Lesson Plan English 6

Chia sẻ: hanhquanglove

Grade 6 English program is the first program in English secondary school curriculum, should not be hard. You do not need to find sites that can teach yourself to be. Just follow the instructions in the textbooks: read the dialogue, writing new dialogue, answer questions, mark true or false, fill in the blanks, ... At any hearing, you asked to buy cassette or CD to listen to a lot of acquaintances. You read the words or phrases difficult to understand, write and check the dictionary, the end of each study session to review and remember that if people see better....

Bạn đang xem 20 trang mẫu tài liệu này, vui lòng download file gốc để xem toàn bộ.

Nội dung Text: Lesson Plan English 6

Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************




LESSON PLAN

ENGLISH 6
The first semester




******************************************************************************* 1
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************


WEEK 1:
Teaching date: 23/ 8 / 2010.
Period 1.
¤n tËp
vµ h­íng dÉn ph­¬ng ph¸p häc m«n
TiÕng Anh 6
Introduction
A. The aims and Objectives:
- Hepl Ss have general knowledge of a new subject and know how to study
EL 6. Ss know the contents of the “ Tieng Anh 6”.
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will able to understand Sth about EL,know
how to learn English effectively, know the content of “Tieng Anh 6”.
* Knowledge:
To present the subject, student book, homework book, the way how to
learn English
* Skill:
Speaking, listening .
B. Teaching procedure:
I/ Preparation:
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,text book, work book.
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.
II. Checking: -Not check

C/ New lesson:

Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Sơ lược về môn Tiếng Anh và SGK(10ms)
How many units are there in English book? There are 16 units
Presents how many lessons in each unit From 5 to 6 lessons
EL là ngôn ngữ phổ biến nhất trên thế giới hiện

******************************************************************************* 2
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
nay… Repeat in chorus
2.Cấu trúc SGK Tiếng Anh 6(10ms) - Ss open the book
- T asks Ss to open their books.
T introduces the strucsture of the “Tieng Anh 6”.
- Sách gồm 16 đơn vị bài học (16 unit) Do following teacher
Mỗi bài gồm 2-3 phần(A-B-C). statements
3.Giới thiệu cách học môn Tiếng Anh: - Listen and give ideas.
- T introduces to Ss some ways of learning EL. - Take notes( Ss discuss
* Present the class statements(10ms) in pairs to decide some
-Teacher statements: best ways of learning
+ Stand up, please El.)
+ Go to the board, please
+ Come back your seat, please.
+ Write down, please
+ Hand up, please - Listen and copy down
+ Keep silent, please
+ Repeat/ again Listen and repeat
+ Give me some examples
+ Learn by heart vocabulary - Copy down on the
+ Answer the questions notebook
 Gives the class regulations:(5ms)
(By Vietnamese)
Asks the students to rebuild the class
regulations

III. Consolidation:(5)
Asks them to learn by heart the class| statements

IV. Homework:(3ms)
- Learn by heart all old structures grammar
- Preparing new lesson : Unit 1 (A1-4)

WEEK 1:
Teaching date: 24/ 8 / 2010.
******************************************************************************* 3
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Period 2.

Unit 1: Greetings
Lesson 1: A1-4
A/The aims and Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, ss are able to use “Hi, Hello”, ”I”m / My name”s ”,
to know greeting each other and introduce theirselves (name), Numbering from 0 to 5,to
introduce themselves correctly and fluently. Threy use numbers from 0 to 5 to count.
* Knowledge:
To present: - Hello/ Hi / I am ..../ My name is........to introduce yourself
-Number 0-5
* Skill: - Develop 4 skills: L,S R,&W.
B/Teaching procedure:
I/ Organization:
- Greeting(1m)
- Check attendance
II/ Preparation:
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.
III/ Checking: -Not check

C/ New lesson:
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation1 (10ms)
+ Pre teach: (vocabulary) Listen and repeat in chorus and
- T. Elicits vocabulary individually
- Present these vocabulary: Copy down
Hello: Xin chµo (Translation) SS play a game – work in pair
Hi: Xin chµo(Translation) Ss work in pair to introduce yourself for
Name: Tªn(Translation) example:
Is/ Am: Lµ(Translation) Hi, I am Lan
I: tôi, tớ, mình(Translation)
+Checking: R.O.R SS listen and repeat in chorus and
+Dialogue build:T sét the scene: Lan í talking to individually
Nga,Ba is talking to Nam. And then copy down on their notebooks
-T elicits the dialogue. -SS work in group: A-B
a.Lan: Hi, I am Lan -Each group has 6 students
Nga: Hi, I am Nga
b.Ba: Hello, My name is Ba Write the letter on their notebook in
Nam: Hello, My name is Nam teacher|s order.

******************************************************************************* 4
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- T asks Ss to fill in the blank.
- T Helps Ss practice dialogue in pairs  Keys:
2. Presentation (15ms)A2,4(11) + Hi.I’m Lan
- T asks Ss to work in groups of 4, Ss greet & + Hello.My name’s Ba
introduce themselves. T checks some pairs.
* Presentation 2:
1.Vocabulary:
+ Pre teach: Present number 0-5: Hue 054
Quang Ninh
- Oh: 0/ - One:1
033
- Two:2/ - Three: 3
- Four: 4/ - Five: 5
+Checking: Slap the board. Quang Tri
053 Da Nang
3.Practice:(15)
0511
+Dictation:T reads: Oh- Five- One- Two- Four….
+Words cue drill:
Use some words cue to write telephone numbers Ha Noi
And make a dialogue: 04
Hai Phong
T: Quang Ninh, please. 031
S: Oh- Three- Three
-T asks –Students anwer in chorus
-Calls some pairs to act out.

III.Consolidation:(3ms)
- Retell briefly the ways of greeting and introducing oneself &numbers from 0 to 5.
Guessing game: uses the words cue drill cards-Students guess the numbers
He says Yes/No
S1: Oh- Three- Three
S2: No
S3: Oh-Five- One-One
S2: Yes
IV.Homework:(1m)
+ Leart by heart vocabulary and cardinal numbers
+ Do exercises 1,2 page 4(Homework book)




WEEK 1:
Teaching date: 25/ 8 / 2010.
******************************************************************************* 5
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Period 3.

Unit 1: Greetings
Lesson 2: A5-8
A.The aims and Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, ss are able to use “How are you?- I’m fine,thanks” to greet
fluently, Ss can count & write from 6 to 10 correctly and quickly.
(Ask and answer the question: How are you? And the anwer : Iam fine, thanks
Number from 6 to 10.)
*Knowledge:To present: - How are you? “I am five, thanhs”to greet each other
-Number 6-10
*Skill: Develop 4 skills.
B/Teaching procedure:
I/ Organization: (1m) – Greeting & Check attendance
II/ Preparation:
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.(jumbled words)
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks.
III/ Checking: -T sticks the poster on the bb.
1. rofu = 2.loelh = 3.enma = 4.ether = 5.ifev =
- T asks Ss to rearrange the letters to make them meaningful words .
- T devides Ss in to 2 teams. One by one to go to the bb to write .T corects and finds out
the winner .
*Answer keys: 1.four; 2.hello; 3.name; 4.three; 5.five
*** New lesson:

Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation 1(10ms)
+ Pre teach:Vocabulary:- T elicits words
- Present these vocabulary: SS listen and repeat in chorus and
- Fine, thanks: KhoÎ, c¸m ¬n(meaning) individially
- Miss: C«(meaning) (chưa có gia đình) And then copy down on their notebook
- Mrs:Bµ(meaning)
- Mr : ông, ngài.( đặt trc tên người đàn ông)
+Checking: What and where: Work in group
2. Asks and answer about the health.
-T sets the scene: Lan goes to school and meets
Ba. She greats him. T elicit the dialogue.
+R O R dialogue: Work in pairs to ask and answer the
a.Lan: Hi, Lan questions:
Nga: Hi, Nga + How are you?
+ I am fine.
******************************************************************************* 6
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Lan: How are you?
Nga:I am fine, thanks - Practice in pair
+ Model sentence: How are you? Copy down.
I am fine, thank you -Practice with a partner .
3. Practice:(20ms)
*A6(12): - T elicits 2 pics, asks Ss to make similar T: How are you?
dialogue in pairs. S:...
- Then T checks some pairs. -Go to the boarb and write down the old
* A7(13): T asks Ss to fill in the gaps to make a numbers( one by one).
completed dialogue between Nam and Lan. -Work individially.
- T checks some pairs and corrects mistakes.
• Presentation 2: -Repeat in chorus and individial
+Revision numbers from 0 to 5:
+ Pre teach: Present number 6 to 10:
- Six: 6 - Seven: 7
- Eight: 8 - Nine: 9 - Ten: 10 -Work in pairs.Listen to teacher and slap
+Checking: matching the word that they hear).
* Practice: + Dictation:-T. reads some telephone - Students to listen and write down by
numbers. English these telephone numbers
Asks students to listen and write down by English
these telephone numbers: 820.029 / 950.443 /
22.653 / 621.590 / 510.682 / 768.527. Write down the words that they hear on
their notebooks.
3.Further practice:(7ms)+Work square(poster). Work in group(2 groups)
- Then T controls and corects. -Go to the boarb and circle the word that
F S E O T they find on the work square.
I N I N e Anwer key:
V T G X n Five, Two, Eight, Ten
E w H O o Nine, Ten, Four, One
G O T E l One
T F O U r Seven
s i x v n
Six
s e v e n
III.Consolidation:(3ms)- How to ask &answer about health
Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-10
IV.Homework:(2ms)Do the numbers3,4 page 5(Homework book).
-Learn by heart vocab,numbers,the ways to asks & answer about the health.
-Ss revise numbers from 0 to 10.
- Pepare for next lesson.

WEEK 2:
******************************************************************************* 7
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Teaching date: 30 / 8 / 2010.
Period 4

Unit 1: Greetings
Lesson 3: B1-3
A/Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use “Good afternoon / good morning/ bye” to
greet one another and count- Write numbers from 10 to 15 correctly and fluently.
- T Helps Ss develop 4 skills (Develop’s Ss speaking skill.)
*Knowledge:
To present: - Good morning/ good afternoon to greet each other/Number 11 to 15.
B/Preparation:
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,picture cues(4), Cards(5)
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks.
C/Procedure:
I. Organization: (1m) – Greeting & Check attendance
II. Checking up: (5ms)
a)T asks S1 to write how to ask and answer about the health on the bb. And then read aloud.
b) T asks S2 write numbers from 6 to 10 and then read aloud.
 Keys:a) S1- Hi. How are you? b) 6.six /7.seven / 8.eight / 9.nine / 10.ten.
S2 – I’m fine, thanks. And you?
S1- Fine ,thanks.
- T corrects and gives marks
III.New lesson:
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation (10ms)
+ Pre teach: Present these vocabulary:
Good morning:Chµo(Buæi s¸ng)- picture -visual Listen and repeat in chorus and
Good afternoon:Chµo(Buæi chiÒu) )- picture individually
Good everning:Chµo(Buæi tèi) )- explaination Copy down
Good night:Chóc ngñ ngon- Meaning- trans
Good bye:Chµo t¹m biÖt( Mine- Situation)
Children:TrÎ em( picture- visual) Work individually
We: (pro) chóng t«i,chóng tớ, chóng ta(ng«i 1 sè nhiÒu- -Go to the board and write down.
situation)
+Checking: R & R.
2.Practice:(5ms)( B1,2(14,15) - work in pairs
*:T elicits 5 pictures B1& helps Ss practise greeting
one another in pairs.
Eg: S1- Good morning ! S2- Good morning ! - Ss listen.
Picture drill. -Read in chorus, Half – half, T- Ss,
******************************************************************************* 8
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
-T runs through the pictures. groups of table or groups of 3.

-Work in pairs
Example Exchange:
S1: Good (morning)
S2: Good (morning)

- Ss translate dialogue in to
*B3(P15)(5ms):Presentation dialogue - T sets the vietnamese
scene: Miss Hoa is talking to her Ss.
T helps Ss read dialogue (a) P 15 in chorus, T-wc, S-
S,Groups of 3,or groups of table…
-T asks Ss to translate dialogue in to vietnamese -Work in pairs following example
(Note:We are = We’re). exchange:
*B4(P16) (4ms)*Practice:T sets the scene: Lan meets S1: Seven and eight?
Nga when she goes to school. S2: Fifteen
- T asks Ss to fill in the gaps.Then T checks some pairs. *keys:
T gives answer keys. + Nga: Good afternoon,Lan.
*.Practice:(6ms)- T elicits numbers from 11 to 15 + Nga: I’m fine, thanks
+Word cues drill :Run through the cues, asks Ss
- Practice in pairs.
calculate & give result s.Let’s practise in pairs. - Listen and repeat in chorus
-T gets feedback .
Eleven: 11 / Twelve: 12 / Thirteen: 13 - Ss work individually to read
Fourteen:14 / Fifteen: 15
9+2 numbers from 0 to 15 in the
10 + 2 following ways:
7+8
+ oh,one,two,three..
+ oh, two,four,six…
7+5 + one, three,five,seven…
5+6
6+8


3.Further practice:(5ms)
- Ss listen and write. Work
+Dictation: Teacher reads: Six, twelve, two, five,
individually.
thirteen, eight, eleven, four,fourteen, seven, ten,
fifteen, one, three, oh, nine

III.Consolidation:(2ms): - Asks Ss sums up the main contents of the lesson: “ to great one
another, numbers from 0 to 15”
IV.Homework:(1ms):
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-15 & vocabulary.
-Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).Prepare for next lesson.
WEEK 2:
******************************************************************************* 9
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Teaching date: 31 / 8 / 2010.
Period 5

Unit 1: Greetings
Lesson 4: C1-2-3
A/The aim and Objectives:
I.The aims:
- Help Ss use “ How old are you?- I’m …” to talk about ages, count & write numbers from 16
to 20. Develop 4 skills.
II.The objectives:
-By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to use “How old are you? – I’m + ages.” To talk
about the ages and contrast with “ How are you?”.
- Ss can count from 16 to 20 correctly and fluently
- Develop’s Ss speaking and reading skill.
*Knowledge:
To present: -“How old are you” to talk about age and contrast with “How are you”
-Number 16 to 20
B/Preparation:
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,picture cues,Cards(2)
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks.
C/Procedure:
I. Organization: (1m) – Greeting & Check attendance
II. Checking up: (5ms) nine
-T asks S1 to write vocabulary on board. eight
- T asks other Ss to write numbers: network Numbers
three
* Keys: + vocabulary of last lesson. 0-15
+ Numbers: one, two,three,… four one
- T corrects and gives marks.
III.New lesson: eleven (…)

Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities
1.Presentation (10ms)
+ Pre teach: Listen and repeat in chorus and
Present numbers: 10’ works individially
Sixteen: 16 / Seventeen: 17 Copy down
Eighteen: 18 / Nineteen: 19 / Twenty: 20
- Retell the numbers from 0 to 15.
+Checking: Slap the boarb.
* C3(P18): Work individially
+ Presentation: -T sets the scene: Nga & Lan
meet their teacher, Mrs Hoa.Ba meets Phong 1st -Go to the boarb and write down

******************************************************************************* 10
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
time.
- Ss listen to the dialogue and read silently.
T helps Ss practise dialogue : T-S; Ss-Ss; pairs…
20’
-T gives instructions. -Ss play the game with two teams.
Teacher contrast with “ How are you?”
*Model sentence: - Translate in to Vietnamese .
How old are you? -Work in pairs

I am (12) years old
-T concept check meaning, form… -Work in group to find the words
2.Practice:(20ms) with the number
a)Pelmanism:- T. runs through the cards.
-T finds out the winner. -Work in pairs to ask and answer
A B C D E the questions
Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty
a b c d e
16 17 18 19 20
* Practice: 8’
- Word cue drill. -Write the number after listening.
T runs through the cues. -Work in individially
16 17 18 19 20…
-T models: T: How old are you? - Listen and repeat in chorus.
S: I’m /12/
-T helps Ss practise speaking :T-Ss;Ss-Ss;pairs...
3.Further practice:(8ms:) 4’
*C5 P. 19
-T guides Ss to play: “bingo”(Number 0-20)
Teacher reads : 10, 7, 19, 20, 6/ 8, 11,13, 15, 0/ - Ss practise speaking:
16, 12, 1, 17, 3/ 5,4,2,18,15/ ….. half- hafl; pairs, T-Ss…
-T finds out the winner.
-Let Ss draw a square with numbers: 0-20.
III.Consolidation:(2ms)
- T sums up the main contentsof the lesson.
- Remember the numbers & ways to talk about the ages
IV.Homework:(2ms)
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20.
- How to ask and answer about ages
-Doing the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book)
-Prepare for next lesson.



******************************************************************************* 11
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
WEEK 2:
Teaching date: 04 / 09/ 2010.
Period 6

Unit 1: Greetings
Lesson 5: C4 - 5
A/The aims and Objectives:
I.The aims: - To help Ss use numbers from 0 to 20, give telephone numbers.
- Develop 4 skills.
II. The objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to count numbers from 0 to 20 and read the
telephone numbers fluently & correctly.
B/Preparation: T: Lesson plan,extra board(survey), shark attack.
S: Do homework, books & notebooks.
C/Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) –Greeting & Check attendance.
II.Checking up + Warm up(5’) - T helps Ss play : Shark attack.
- T explains the rules of the game.
- T gives a cue: This is a noun that has 6 leters. N U M B E R
- Asks Ss guess the letters.T corrects and give answer keys.
III. New lesson:
Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities
1.Presentation (10ms) 7’
+Checking: Slap the boarb:
20 Listen and repeat in chorus and
6 9 7
individially
Copy down
11 5 15
12 Work individially
2.Practice:(20ms) -Go to the boarb and write down
a)Pelmanism:- T. runs through the cards.
-T finds out the winner. 16’
A B C D E -Work in group to find the words with
the number
Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty
d c e b a
16 17 18 19 20 Work individially
b)jumbled words: -Go to the boarb and write down
+ ETGIH= eight + THRTENIE= thirteen
+TW EELV= twelve + EELVEN=eleven
+ TWNETY=twenty +FOTEENUR= fourteen -Work in individially then play a game
+S EEVN= seven +NIETENEN=nineteen
in 2 teams.
******************************************************************************* 12
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
-T asks Ss to rearrange the letters to make the - Copy answer keys.
words meaningful.T devides Ss in to 2 teams.
T checks the words and finds out the winner
*Play a game: Guessing game.
* Guessing game: T asks Ss to write 1 6’ 1 person go to the board & the others
number on a piece of paper.The rest of the guess the numbers.
class guess.
Eg. “Three?” – Yes/No - Work in pair to ask and answer
3.Further practice:(8ms) the telephone number
*Dictation and picture cue drill: - T reads the Eg.
following telephone numbers, asks Ss write S1: What is your number?
down. S2: (oh-five- one-one, eight-two)
04842689 054752590
091569742 0511854347
085571321 071837598
033632437 012541659. -Ss write down on their notebook.
-T checks Ss’ writing by asking as follows: -Work individually
T: “What’s your number?
S: Oh-two-four… 5’
-T helps Ss practise: T-WC, half – half, pairs… - Practice read the telephone
4.Survey:-T shows a poster. numbers.
Name Telephone numbers
Mai 02403859077
Lan 02403828115
-Asks Ss go around, asks information & fill in
the tables. -Ss go around the room and ask
information.
* Models: S1: What’s your name?
S2:My name’s ____ - Fill in the grid
S1: What’s your telephone number? - Work individually.
S2: 02403 859077.
-T gets feedback.

III.Consolidation:(2ms)
- Retell the main points of this lesson.( Numbers from 0 to 20,How to ask and answer the
telephone numbers)
IV.Homework:(2ms)
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20.
-Doing exercises C1-7 page 8-12 in work book.
-Preparing new lesson: Unit 2: A1-4.


******************************************************************************* 13
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
WEEK 3:
Teaching date: 06 / 09/ 2010.
Period 7

Unit 2: at school
Lesson 1: A1-4
A/The aims and Objectives:
I.The aims: - To help Ss use classroom imperative : “come in/ open your book/…”
- Develop 4 skills.
II.The objectives: - By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to use classroom
imperatives correctly and fluently, understand T’s requests well.(T’s commands).
*Knowledge:
Classroom imperative to understand the teacher|s command s:
Come in / Sit down / Stand up / Open your book /Close your book.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, extra board(warm up)
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and check attendance.
II.Checking up(5’) – T hangs a poster:
a)9 – 5 = b) 16+2= c)4-4= d) 20-7=
e) 8: 4= f) 5+3= …..
(eight divide by four makes two)
- T asks 2 Ss to give the results on board : S1: a,b,c / S2: d,e,f.
- T corrects and give answer keys. Then gives them marks.
III. New lesson:
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
• Revision: (5ms)
*Noughts and crosess: 5’ - Play a game in two teams
9-5 20-7 10+2 - Then copy down answer keys
17+1 6+5 6+8
3-3 6×3 5+3
1.Presentation (8ms)
+ Pre teach: 7’
(To) come in:§i vµo
Listen and repeat in chorus and
(To) sit down:Ngåi xuèng
individially
(To) Stand up :§øng len -Copy down.
(To) open your book :Më s¸ch ra
 Come back your seat.
(To) close your book: GÊp s¸ch l¹i
 Clap your hand
* Checking: R & R

******************************************************************************* 14
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
2 .Presentation text: A1 P.20. 8’
- T sets the scene: At the classroom, teacher
says sth to her Ss.
T elicits 6 pictures & helps Ss practise these Work individially
sentences. -Go to the boarb and write down
- Concept check:
+ Asks Ss to translate these sentences in to - Listen and practice
Vietnamese.
+ Use: imperatives.
- Ss translate in to Vietnamese
 3.A2(p.21) - Match and write:
*Practice:- T helps Ss read 5 phrases in the box 9’
& runs through 5 pictures.
- T asks Ss to match the imperatives with the - Read 5 phrases in the box.
pictures. - Work individually
-Match the imperatives with the
- T gets feed back.
pictures.Work in pairs.
+Mime drill: - T asks Ss to look at T’s actions and
says:Teacher mines:
* come in / sit down / Stand up /
open your book / close your book *Student say:
come in/ sit down / Stand up
+Simon sayS: A3 p.22:
open your book / close your book
-T helps Ss play “ Simon says” to practise the 8’
- Look at T’s actions then say
imperatives
in chorus.
4.Further practice:(7ms)
*Mapped dialogue: - T elicits the dialogue & helps Ss practice the dialogue in pairs,
Ss practise dialogue: in pairs, T- WC, half-half… T - WC; half – half…
(T sets the scene: Miss Huong & Ss are greeting
Miss Hoa Children
one another).
S1: Good morning! …..morning…
S2: Good morning, Miss Hoa! …morning.
S1: How are you?
S2: We are fine. How are you? How are …?
… fine.How …?
S1: Fine, thanks. Sit down
Fine, thanks…
S2: Yes Miss …
S1: And open your books
S2: Yes Miss
III.Consolidation:(1m)- Retell the main points of this lesson.
IV.Homework:(1m) -Ask them to learn by heart the teacher|s commands
Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).Prepare for next lesson.


******************************************************************************* 15
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
WEEK 3:
Teaching date: 08 / 09/ 2010.
Period 8

Unit 2: at school
Lesson 2: B 3,4,6
A/The aims and the objectives:
I. The aims
- To help Ss learn the alphabet and ask ,answer about name, spell the name:
“What’s your name? – My name’s… / How do you spell it / your name?”
- Develop 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to ask and answer the questions to talk about
name and learn the alphabet to spell names correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and check attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
- T calls 2 Ss come to the board and write the classroom imperatives.
-T corrects and gives marks .
* keys: - Come in, sit down, stand up …
III. New lesson:

Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities
 Revision:(2ms)
Simon says the teacher’s command: 2’ Whole class do after teacher
- come in/ sit down/ Stand up/ saying
- open your book/ close your book
1.Presentation:
+ Pre teach(Vocabulary): 7’
- T elicits vocabulary : Listen and repeat in chorus
The ABC: - A B C D E F G - Work individially
-HIJKLMNOP Copy down
- Q R S T U V W X Y Z.
-(to) spell: đánh vần
- How do you spell it? Bạn có thể đánh vần nó không? 14’
+T helps Ss read the alphabet again. - Listen and read the


******************************************************************************* 16
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
2.B4(p25): dialogue in pairs.
- T presentation dialogue.
T sets the scene: The T meets one of her Ss and ask
her some questions.
-T helps Ss read dialogue : T-WC ; pairs. Listen and repeat in chorus.
- Let Ss practise the dialogue in pairs -Listen and copy down.
- T helps Ss select out model sentences: Work individially
T: What’s your name?
Lan: My name’s Lan.
T: How do you spell it/ your name?
Lan: L-A-N,Lan.
-Concept check: meaning,use,form. 8’ - Copy down on their
* Use: asks and answer about name. notebooks.
* Form:-What’s your name? - Work individually.
- My name’s + tên mình.
- How do you spell it?
* Practice:Word cues drill.
-T runs through word cues.
Khoa Mai Lam Son Loan Copy down.
-T models: - Practise in pairs the
S1: What’s your name? dialogue.
S2: My name’s Khoa.
S1: How do you spell it? 4’
S2: K-H-O-A,Khoa. - Ss practise in pairs.
-T helps Ss practise speaking : T-WC; half-half; pairs.
-Asks Ss practise in pairs,ask and answer the real - Listen to the ABC song.
name. Then T gets feedback.
* Production:
- Let Ss listen to the ABC song.

III.Consolidation:(2ms)
- Retell the main point of this lesson.
- T sums up: ask and answer about name, how to spell names.
IV.Homework:(2ms)
- Ask them to learn by heart vocabulary,the alphabet song,
How to ask and answer about name, then spell name.
- Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).
- Prepare for next lesson.



******************************************************************************* 17
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
WEEK 3:
Teaching date: 08 / 09/ 2010.
Period 9

Unit 2: at school
Lesson 3: B1,2,5,6
A/The aims and the objectives:
I. The aims: -To helps Ss asks and answer about Where they live :
“where do you live? – I live in/ on/ at …”
- To help Ss practise 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to ask and answer the questions :
“where do you live? – I live in/on…” correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
- T calls 2 Ss come to the board to read aloud the alphabet.
- Other gives his/her name and spell it.
* keys: - A/B/C/D/E/F/G ….
- What’s your name? – My name’s Lan.
- How do you spell it? - L-A-N,Lan.
+ T corrects and gives marks.
III. New lesson: (37’)
Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities
 Presentation: Pre-teach:(5ms)
1/Vocabulary: - T elicits vocabulay.
Coppy down and repeat in chorus.
(to) Live: Sèng (trans)
(in) a house: Ng«i nhµ - Picture
(on) a street:Con ®ường- Draw
(in ) a city:Thµnh phè – (trans)
(at) 12 THD street (trans)
*Checking:Matching: SS match the words in -Go to the boarb and match
English and the words in VietNamese
• Presentation dialogue: 10’ - Work in pairs
2. B1(p23): - T sets the scene: Lan meets a
school boy on a street(Nam).They are talking to
each other. Example exchange:
S1: Where do you live?

******************************************************************************* 18
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss listen to the dialogue and repeat. Let Ss S2: On (Le Loi street)
practise speaking in pairs.
- T selects out model sentences and write on
board. Work in group to make questions
Model sentences: and answer following Example
A: Where do you live? exchange:
B: I live on Tran Phu street S1: Where do you live?
In: a house/ a city/ Hue/ Viet nam. S2: On (Le Loi street)
Concept check:meaning,form,use .
* Use: Hỏi và trả lời nơi bạn em or ai đó sinh sống.
3.Practice:(8ms) T runs through these cues:
+Word cue drill: 9’
A city / HCM city / a house -Ss enjoy the game. ( in 2 group)
Ha noi / Le loi street
- Play agame in 2 teams
Hung vuong street
+Noughts and crossess:
A house Lach Tray Trang Tien 4’
A street Da Nang A city
Listen and repeat in chorus and
Dong Hoi Hang Bong Hung Vuong
individially
-T models: + Where do you live?
Copy down
I live in a house
T helps Ss practise asking & answering : Ss-Ss;
T-Ss; pairs.
Work in group to guess the leters
 Production: of the words
+ B2(p24):
T helps Ss read the sentences p.24 and asks them
to learn by heart at home. 7’
Coppy down
+ B4(p25):
- T runs through the questions from a) to d).
- Asks Ss to write the answer on their notebooks. -Work in groups of 4 or 3
- T gets feedback.
a) My name’s .. c) I live in/on…
b) I’m 12. d) L-a-n,Lan
III.Consolidation:(1m) – Retell the main points of this lesson.
- T sums up: Where do you live? – I live in/ on…
IV.Homework:(2ms)
-Ask them to learn by heart the form and vocabulary
-Do the exercises 3 on page 12; 6 p.13 (Homework book).
- Prepare for next lesson.

******************************************************************************* 19
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
WEEK 4:
Teaching date: 13 / 09/ 2010.
Period 10

Unit 2: at school
Lesson 4: C1
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:
-To helps Ss use “This/That is …” in possitive statements and Y/N questions:
“ Is this/Is that your + N ? – Yes, it is./ No,it isn’t.” to talk about people and things at school.
- To help Ss practise 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use: “This/That is …” and Yes/No questions:
“Is this/that your +N? – Yes it is / No, it isn’t.” correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’) -T hangs a poster ( 3 questions) then asks 2 Ss to go to the board
and answer the questions: a) What’s your name?
b) How do you spell it?
c) Where do you live?
-T corrects and give marks .
* Keys: a)My name’s …./ b) M-a-I, Mai / c) I live in/on….
III. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities
1.Presentation:(10ms)
+Pre teach(Vocabulary) 10’ Listen and repeat in chorus
- T elicits vocabulary on the board. and individially
(a) student: häc sinh(example) Copy down
(a) teacher: gi¸o viªn(example)
(a) school: trưêng häc(example)
(a) class: líp häc(example)
(a) Classroom: phòng học (explain)
Work in individially to match
(a) desk: bµn häc(Realia)
the word in English with the
* Check: R & R 12’ words in Vietnamese
2/ C1(p.26):*Presentaion dialogue: -T sets the
scene: Ba introduces about his school and his class; He
is talking to Nam. Asks Ss to listen to the radio and -Listen to and repeat the radio
repeat in chorus. in chorus.

******************************************************************************* 20
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- T helps Ss select out the model sentences: - work individually.
*a) This is my school/ father. - Ss select out the model
sentences
That is my desk/ mother.
Work in pairs to ask and
*b)Is this/that your teacher/desk? answer the questions and the
- Yes,it is /No, it isn’t. word cues
+ Concept check: meaning,form,use.
-T asks Ss to translate in to vietnamese.
- Copy down form on
* Form:
their notebook.
a) Giới thiệu người or vật ở gần hay ở xa:
This / That + is+ my + N(số ít) - Work individually.
b) Hỏi đoán và trả lời về người or vật ở gần/ xa:
+ Is this/ that + your + N( vật số ít)?
Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t.( isn’t = is not).
+ Is this/that + your + N ( người số ít)?
Yes,he/she is / No, he/she isn’t. Work in chorus, Work in pairs
 3/Practice:Word cue drill:
8’
- T runs through the word cues.
a) This/school (√ ) b) That/class(x)
c)This/classroom (√) d) That/book(x) Copy down then practise in
e)This/teacher/he(√) f)That/student/she(x) pairs
+ T models:
- This is my school.
Is this your school ? Yes,it is.
- Practise
-That is my student. Ss to point at real things in and
Is that your student? No,she isn’t. around the classroom , then
T helps Ss practise: T-Ss; half-half;pairs. practise as word cues.
T gets feedback. (ruler,eraser, pen,book,..)
5’
*Further Practice:(20ms):Realia drill:
Tasks Ss to point at real things in and around the Work in pair
classroom , then practise as word cues.( ruler,eraser,
pen,book,..) – T goes around & helps Ss.Then T checks
some pairs.
Eg:T:Is this your desk? S: Yes, it is
III.Consolidation:(3ms)
– Retell the main points of this lesson.
-T sums up: giới thiệu người/vât ở gần /xa;Hỏi đoán người/vật ở gần/ xa và trả lời.
IV.Homework:(1m)
-Asking them to learn by heart the form: Is this/ that….?, & learn by hear vocabulary.
-Doing the number 1, 2 p 14, 15.(Homework book)
- Prepare for next leson.


******************************************************************************* 21
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
WEEK 4:
Teaching date: 14 / 09/ 2010.
Period 11

Unit 2: at school
Lesson 5: C 2 - 4.My School
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims: -
-To helps Ss use the questions: “What is this/that?” And answer : “It is a/an + N (số ít)”
-To help Ss develop 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
-By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use structure: “What’s this/that? - It’s a/an + N(số
ít)” To talk about things in classroom.Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school bag,pencil…).
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’) -T asks 2 Ss to go to the board to do the homework:
a)this/classroom(√) b) That/student/ he(x)
-T corrects and give marks .
* Keys: a) This is my classroom.
Is this your classroom? –Yes, it is.
b)That is my student.
Is that your student? – No, he isn’t.
III. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities
1.Presentation:(15ms) - Listen and repeat in chorus.
– T elicits vocabulary on board. - Work individually.
+Pre teach:Use pictures and realias to present 15’
- Copy down on the
vocabulary: notebooks.
(a) door: cöa chÝnh/ (a) window: cöa sæ - Retell some words
(a) board: b¶ng/ (a) clock: đång hå Work in group
(a) waster basket: Thùng rác Teacher Class
(a) school bag: cặp sách
(a)pencil: bút chì/ (a) pen: bút mực What…? It is….
(a) ruler: thước kẻ / (an) eraser: cái tẩy.
+Checking: R & R. How do….?
+Dialogue build:- T elicits dialogue. D-o-o-r….
T: What is this/that?
S:It is a door/an eraser. 10’

******************************************************************************* 22
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
T: How do you spell it? - Ss practice the dialogue: T-Ss;
S:D-O-O-R? half-half; pairs.
T helps Ss practise dialogue: T-Ss; half-half;
pairs. Then T asks Ss to complete the missing
words: this, it, is, spell. Ss to complete the missing words:
- Concept check: this, it, is, spell.
+ Meaning: T asks Ss translate dialogue in to - Ss practice in pairs
Vietnamese.
+ Form: What’s this/that?
W P E N S C E X
It’s+a/an+N(số ít)
O E D D C L R D
+Use: Hỏi và trả lời về tên đồ vật ở gần or xa. D N E O H O A R
2.Practice:(17ms): - T asks Ss to practise 17’ N C S O O C S A
asking and answering with real things in or I I K R O K E O
around class in pairs; T- Wc ; … W L R U L E R B
Eg: What’s this? – It’s a ruler. - Play a game in 2 teams.
*Wordsquare:
-Presents the wordsquare & asks Ss to work in pairs SS must find out the words in the
to find out the words by circling the word. wordsquare
-Devides the class into two groups to practice. - Playing the game in groups by
- Corrects & comments. answering the questions.
3.Further practice:(7ms) -Correcting the mistakes.
Lucky number:
- Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to play
the game in groups. - Playa game in two teams
-Corrects & comments
* Questions:  Keys:
1. How do you spell DESK ? 1.a/ 2.b/ 3. / 4.c/ 5.d/ 6.e/ 7. / 8.f/
2. How do you spell CLASSROOM ? 9. / 10.g.
3. LUCKY NUMBER
4. How do you spell CLOCK ?
5. How do you spell PENCIL ?
6. How do you spell RULER ?
7. LUCKY NUMBER
8. How do you spell ERASER ?
9. LUCKY NUMBER
10. How do you spell WINDOW ?
III/Consolidation.(3ms)Asks Ss to give the questions used to talk about things in the
classroom:‘What‘s This/That ?- It’s a/an’’ Then T asks Ss to summarise the general
idea of the lesson.
IV.Homeworks: (2ms)-Study the ‘What‘s This/That ?‘ ‘ It‘s a/an‘‘ to talk about
things in
the classroom.
- Learn by heart vocabulary and structures .

******************************************************************************* 23
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Do exercises in page 15-16 in workbook, ex 4 in page 10-11(VBT).
- Prepare pictures of things in the house.
WEEK 4:
Teaching date: 15 / 09/ 2010.
Period 12

Unit 3: at home
Lesson 1: A1-2. My house.
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:
-Teach Ss “Wh- questions” with “these/ those” “What are these/those?” And answer : “They
are + N (s/es)”. And know about living room vocabulary, to talk about things in the house.
- To help Ss develop 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to practice: “What’s this/that? - It’s a/an + N(số
ít)”/ “What are these/those?” And answer : “They are + N (s/es)” And livingroom
vocabulary to talk about things in the house.Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school bag,pencil…),
picture A1.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’) -T asks 2 Ss to go to the board to do the homework:
a)this/a ruler b) That/an eraser
-T corrects and give marks .
* Keys: a) What’s this? – It’s a ruler
b) What’s is that? – It’s an eraser.
III. New lesson: (35’) – In last lesson, We know how to ask and answer about the name of a
thing. Today, we learn how to ask and answer aboutb names of things ( plural N)
Teacher/ s activities T Students/ activities
1.Presentation:(8ms) 9’
+Pre teach:(Vocabulary) Use pictures and
realias to present vocabulary:
- Listening to
(a) lamp: đèn điện ( explain )
(a)bookshelf: Giá sách( explain ) - Repeat in chorus.
(a) chair: ghế tựa /(a)couch: ghế dài (visual)
(an) armchair: ghế bành(có tay vị 2 bên) - work individually
(a) table: bàn (có thể dùng làm bàn ăn)
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
(a) T. V: Ti vi (explain)= Television the meaning & the prounciation by
(a) stool: ghế đẩu ( trans) matching the words & the pictrures.

******************************************************************************* 24
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
(a) stereo: radio,đài (realia)
*Check: matching.

- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation. - Giving the meaning & the
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the pronunciation.
mistakes. - Copy down on the notebook.
2/ A2(p31): * Presentaion text: This is Nam 9’ Listen and repeat in chorus and work
house. Here’s the livingroom. Hung is asking individially
Nam about things in the livingroom.
-T runs through pictures.Then elicits model
sentences: T- Wc ; pairs, individually. -Practicing in two groups. Correcting
+Model sentences: the mistakes.
What is this?/that?
It is a table Work in group (2 group)
What are these?/those? - Reading the text.
They are tables - Correcting the pronunciation.
- concept check:meaning,form, use
+ Form: What are these/those?
They are + N(e/es) - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
Use : The ways to asks and answer about the - Making sentences for the next
name of things ( near or far) 10’ cues.
* Note: This/that( singular)
=> These/those ( plural) - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
3.Practice:(10ms) Work in pairs.
+Picture drill: A1,2. P31:- T runs through picture
and asks Ss listento the radio.
Eg: S1:What is this? - S2: It is a…. - Copy down on the notebook.
S1:What are those? - S2:They are …….
- Introduces the example exchange & Hepls Ss to Note:
practise asking and answering about things in A1. Thông thường thêm “s” vào sau
*A2: T helps Ss practise using structure: dt số ít, những dt có tận cùng là:
-What are these? – Theyare tables o/x/ss/ch/sh/.. + “es”. Nếu kết thúc
- What are those? – They are … là “f” thì chuyển F→ V+ es.
- Asks Ss practise: T-WC; half-half; open pairs, close
7’
pairs.( 1 St points at things in picture A2) -Ss use realia things in classroom to
- T gets feedback, corrects the mistakes. ask and answer about the name of
4*Further practice: - T explains to Ss the rules things.
of adding “s/es” after singular noun to make
them plural nouns
III. Consolidation.(2ms)
T sums up: ‘Wh- questions with (This/that) These / Those & living- room vocabulary.
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
IV. Homeworks: (1m)
Learn by heart ‘Wh’ questions with (This/that) These / Those & living- room vocabs.

******************************************************************************* 25
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Learn the model dialogue by heart.
- Prepare pictures of things in the house for next lesson.


WEEK 5:
Teaching date: 20 / 09/ 2010.
Period 13

Unit 3: at home
Lesson 2: A3-4. My house.
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:
- To Help Ss use family vocabulary,possessive pronouns(đtsh: your/my/his/her…).
Questions: Who is this? / Who is that? – It is …
- Develop 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use family vocabulary , then Ss practise
asking and answering questions: “Who’s this? Who’s that? – It’s her/ his …”.
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school bag,pencil…),
picture A1.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things, their photographs.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
-T asks 2 Ss to go to the board to practise asking and answering with word cues:
a)What/this?/television. c)What/that?/lamp.
b)What/these?/stool. d)What/those?/bookshelf
-T corrects and give marks .
* Keys: a) What’s this? – It’s a television/ b)What are these?- They are stools.
c) What’s is that? – It’s a lamp/ d)What are those? – They are bookshelves.
III. New lesson: (35’)
* In last lesson, We learn how to ask and answer names of things.Today we learn how to ask
and answer with: “Who is this/that? – It is…”
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
I. Presentation:(8ms)
1.Preteach: -T elicits vocabulary on the board . - Listening to the words.
- Family: gia ®×nh (situation) - Repeating the words in chorus &
- Father : bè,ba (visual ) in individual.
- Mother: MÑ, m¸ (visual ) - Correcting the mistakes.
- Sister : chÞ g¸i, em g¸i (…) - Giving the meaning & the
- Brother: anh trai,em trai(…) pronunciation.
- My -Copying the words.

******************************************************************************* 26
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- His family/father/
- Her mother/brother/sister
- Your
*Check: mathing. - Listening to the dialogue.
2/A3(p32)(10ms): - Presentaion text: - Practicing the dialogue in chorus.
T sets the scene: This is Ba.He is talking about his
family members. - Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Asks Ss listen to the radio once,then twice.Then -Correcting pronunciation & the
asks them listen to and repeat the text in chorus. mistakes.
a) T hangs a poster and show a grid:
Ba's family * Look at the grid:
Tªn Quan hÖ Tuæi NghÒ nghiÖp Ss read the dialogue and then fill
Ba - 12 Student in the grid .
Nga Mother - Teacher - Work individually.
Ha Sister 15 student Mai Ba
Lan farther - Docter
Who’s this/that?
Asks Ss read the dialogue silently for details & fill in
It’s__ mother
the grid individually.(5’)
What’s _ name?
- T gets feedback.
Her name’s_
b)Elicits the dialogue on the board: Dialogue build
S1: who's this/that? - S2: It's his mother
-Work individually then share with
S1: What's her name? - S2: Her name's Nga
their partners.
-Asks Ss fill in the dialogue: his/her/mother/is.
* Cocept check: Meaning,use,form.
+ Form: Who + is + this/that?
It’s his/her + N(số ít)
Example Exchange:
What + is + his/her name?
S1: Who's that?
His/Her name + is + tên.
S2: That's his mother/father/sister
*II/practice(12’) -Word cues drill.
S1: What's his/her name?
- T runs through the cues.
S2: His/her name's Nga/Ha/Lan
Nga Ha Ba
Mother(35) Father(40) Brother(14)
*T models :- Who is that ?
It’s her mother Ss draw their family.
-Helps Ss practise the dialogue : T-Wc ; half-half ;
open pairs… S1: Who's this?
III/ Production:(8ms) S2: It's my...
- Picture drill( Ss’ photographs) S1: What's his/her name?
Asks Ss use their photos to practise speaking in S2: His/her name's ...
pairs/groups of 4.
( as the dialogue in « practice »).
- T gets feedback : check some pairs.
IV.Consolidation(3ms)
- Asks Ss retell the main points of this lesson.
- Asks Ss to explain the way to use who's this/ that?.
******************************************************************************* 27
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework: (1m) – Ss learn by heart vocabulary and structures “ Who“s “?“
- Study the possessive pronouns.
- Prepare for next lesson.
WEEK 5:
Teaching date: 21 / 09/ 2010.
Period 14

Unit 3: at home
Lesson 3: B1-2. Numbers
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:
- To Help Ss know the way to count things using numbers from 21 to 100and Ss know how
to pronounce plural nouns.
- Develop Ss’ 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to count things using numbers from 21 to 100
and pronounce plural nouns.
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school bag,pencil…),
picture A1, 3 cards: /s/; /z/;/iz/.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
-T asks1 St to go to the board to write vocabulary and read them aloud.
- Other to ask and answer the qs using card: Ba/brother, 12
-T corrects and give marks .
* Keys: a) Who’s this? – It’s her brother.
What’s his name? - His name’s Ba.
How old is he? – He’s 12 years old.
III. New lesson: (35’)
* In last lesson, We practised the qs: Who’s this/that? – it’s…..” Today , We are going to learn
numbers from 21 to 100 and the ways to pronounce plural nouns.




******************************************************************************* 28
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation(10’)
Revision some of the numbers from 0 to 20: 0, 1, A= 1 B D F H I K N O P Q R S T U
…..9/10/7/25/5/29/1/15….20 (2’) V W S Y Z= 26
* Preteach: (vocabulary) Listen and repeat in chorus and
-Use the card to present voabulary: individially
+ Thirty:30 / Forty: 40 /Fifty: 50/ Sixty:60 Copy down
Seventy:70/ Eight:80/ Ninety: 90.
One hundred:100
+ twenty-one/ twenty-two… - Listening to the words.
+ Thirty-one/ thirty-two… - Repeat the words in chorus.
- Correcting the mistakes.
* check: what and where.
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
using the situation. -Copying the words.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.
2.Practice:(20ms) Work in groups of 4
+Snakes and ladder: B1 P.35
-Gives instructions. Help Ss play a game in Work in pairs
groups of 4. - Play agame in table
+Realia drill: B2 P.36.
- Asks Ss to practise speaking(use real S1: There one door
things around the classroom) S2: And there are 22 desks
Eg: -S1: There is one door. -Work in pairs
S2: And there are 22 desks

4.Further practice:(8ms):
-T runs throught the pics in B2.
Ss count things in the pictures and fill in to boxes -Work in individially
below the picture.Then check Ss’ answer.
+Dictation lists: Students write:
T reads: Desk, rulers, benches, students, tables, /s/ /z/ /iz/
books, clocks, couches, door, windows, houses,
lamps desks Rulers Benches
- Helps Ss pronounce the plural nouns Students Tables Couches
- Gives the rules of ending sounds:/s/;/z/;/iz/. Books Doors Houses
+ /s/ :nouns ending in: Ks,ps,ts Clocks Windows
+ /iz/:nouns ending in: ches,shes,ses,ges,xes,zes. lamps
+ /z/: the rest nouns.
-Read the list of words: desks,rulers….
- T asks Ss put the words in 3groups according to
the pronunciation:

******************************************************************************* 29
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
-T gets feedback.




IV.Consolidation:(3ms)
- Retel the main points of this lesson.
- Asks Ss to give the pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/, /z/, /iz/ ).
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.

V.Homework:(1m)
- Study the pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/, /z/, /iz/ ).
- Learn by heart the numbers from 21 to 100 and write detail: Twenty- one; twenty – two…
- Exercise: 1 & 2 .P 21. Workbook.
- Prepare the school aids such as: ruler, pencil, pen...

WEEK 5:
Date of preparing: 18/9/2010 - Date of teaching: 22 / 09/ 2010.
Period 15
Unit 3: at home
Lesson 4: B3-6. Numbers.
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:
- To Help Ss make questions about quantities using: “How many+ N(s/es)+ are there?” and
further practise numbers to talk about things in the classroom, livingroom and family.
- Develop Ss’ 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use questions and answers with “ How
many..?.Ss use numbers to talk about things around them fluently.
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
-T asks Ss to make 5 sentences using: There is/are + số lượng + N(s/es).
-T corrects, remarks and give marks .

******************************************************************************* 30
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
* Keys: - There is one book./There are 5 coaches./ There is …
III. New lesson: (35’)
* In last lesson, We learned how to make sentences with: “ There is/are+ quantities+ N(s/es).
Now we are going to learn the way to make questions and answer with
“ How many + N(s/es)+are there?- There is/are..”
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
*.Revision (5ms)+Chain game: B2 P.36
Students use the information they have filled in B2P.36 to
describe their classroom to check the form “There is. There
are..” Work in individially
Example:- S1: There is one door
S2: There are one door and six windows
S3:......
1.Presentation:(10ms) - Listen and repeat in chorus.
+Preteach(vocabulary): T elicits vocabulary and write on the - Copy down .
bb. - Work individually
-(a) bookcase = (a) bookshelf (synanym).
- How many…?Bao nhiêu..? (trans)
People(n) người. -Listen and repeat in chorus and
*check: R & R individially
2/Presentation text: B3 P.37
- Ask and answer about quantities.
-Dialogue build,point at real things to elicit the dialogue .
Help Ss read dialogue - Reading the dialogue in individual.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
-Present the text by T reads the model and gives the
structures and gives the new structure
+Model sentences: -Ss fill in the blanks: many/are
Nam:How many doors are there ? /there/is.
benches Copy down
Lan: There is one in my family
are eight - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Concept check meaning,form..
*Form:
How many+N(s/es)+ are there?
There are/ is+ Number+ n
- Gives the usage(by Vietnamese) - Making sentences for the next cues.
3.Practice:(20ms) - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
+Picture drill:(B2 P.36 & B5 P.37) –T runs through
pictures.Help Ss practise speaking:T-WC/half-half - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. Ex:
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in

******************************************************************************* 31
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
chorus & in individual. S1: How many desk are there ?
4.Production:(7ms)- T elicits the table S2: There are six?
+S urvey: Copy the survey on the board and make up the Ss to make sentences for the next.
questions:
S1: How many people are there in your family?
S2: There are ..
Name In your family? In your house? In your classroom?
people Chairs lamps tables desks windows students
Ba 3


IV.Consolidation:(1m)
- Asks Ss to give the questions & the numbers to talk about things in the classroom, the living-
room & the family. How to ask and answer about quantities.
S1: How many doors/desks are there ?
S2: There is one/ There are [two]
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
IV.Homework:(1m)
- Learn by heart ‘How many…are there ?’ questions & the exchange.
- Exercise: 3 & 4. P 22. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 38.

WEEK 6:
Date of preparing: 22/9/2010 - Date of teaching: 27 / 09/ 2010.
Period 16

Unit 3: at home
Lesson 5: C1-2-4.
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:
- To Help Ss read a text for details and talk about jobs.
- Develop Ss’ 4 skills.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about Lan’s
family, Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about jobs.
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially reading skill.
B/ Preparation: ( dạy máy- CNTT)
- T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.

C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
a)Questions: -T shows the picture of C1(38) and asks Ss to answer the Qs.

******************************************************************************* 32
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
1.How many tables are there?/.2.How many armchairs are there?
3.How ……? / 4.How many people …?
* Keys: 1. There is one. 3.There are two
2.There is one. 4. There are four.
- T corrects and give marks.

III. New lesson: (35’)
In last lesson, We learned the way to make questions and answer with “ How many +
N(s/es)+are there?- There is/are..”. Today, we are going read the text about Lan’s family.
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
*Revision(3ms)
+Write it up: From survey lesson 4
Ask students to talk : “There are/ is......” - Listening to the words.
1.Pre- reading:(12ms) - Repeat in chorus then in individual.
+Pre teach(Vocabulary):
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
(an) engineer(picture): kĩ sư -Copying the words.
(a) doctor (picture):bác sĩ
(a) nurse (picture):Y tá
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Working in individual to find out the jobs
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). & comparing in pairs.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the - Giving the information & correcting.
mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation. Working in pairs to guess about Lan’s
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. family:
-Introduces the requirement (luat)& ask Ss to How old.....?
work in individual to find out the jobs. What does he/ she do?
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments. Reading C1 P.38 to check their
2/C1(p38): predictions
a)Open prediction:Asks Ss look at the picture
C1 & guess information to fill in the table:
Lan|s family Working in groups to ask and anwer the
How old..? What does he/she do? question in C1 P.38

Father 40 an engineer - Repeat in chorus then in individual.
Mother 35 a teacher - Making sentences for the next cues.
Brother 8 a student
Lan - Play agame: Lucky numbers.
- T gets feedback. - Answer all the questions from a) to h)
3.While reading(20ms)
– Asks Ss listen to the disc

******************************************************************************* 33
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Asks students to read C1 P.38 to check their - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
predictions. - Correcting the pronunciation.
+Noughts and crosses:
T asks questions from a) to h) in C1 P.38 * Keys:
b) Comprehension questions: b) He is forty.
-Asks Ss read the text again & answer the Qs in c) He is an engineer
pairs. d) She is thirty five
-Gets feedback e) She is a teacher
Eg: a)How many books are there in Lan|s living f) He is eight
room? g) He’s a student
- There are four people in her family h) They are in the livingroom.
c) Hỏi và trả lời về nghề nghiệp:
*T models: + What does he/she do? *Eg: This is song’s family.There are four
- He/she is a teacher/an engineer. people in his family: his father;his
+ What do you/they do? mother;his sister and him.
- I’m a student / They are students This is his father. He’s a doctor.He’s forty
*.Post reading:(7ms) two years old.This is his mother. She’s a
– Talk about song’s family. nurse.She’s thirty nine.His sister is
+Word cue drill: C2 P.39. fifteen.She’s a student.
(T runs through the family as C1).
- Asks Ss look at the family tree(p39). -Ss to make sentences for the next
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to Ss transform the sentences in C1.P.38
repeat in chorus with the information in C2P.39 to write
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. about Song|s family
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Transformation writing

IV.Consolidation:(1m)
– How to introduce about someone’s family.
How to ask and answer about jobs.
Check the form : “How many......? - There is/are....”

V.Homework:(1m)
- Learn by heart cabulary & structures of this lesson.
- Do the exercse 3 P.22 in workbook.
- Prepare for next lesson.


********************************************************************************




******************************************************************************* 34
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************




WEEK 6:
Date of preparing: 23/9/2010 - Date of teaching: 28 / 09/ 2010.
Period 17

Grammar practice
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:- To Help Ss further practise the uses of “To be” ,imperative,numbers, question
words, “There is/There are…” and furniture vocabulary.
- Develop Ss’ 4 skills.
II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use “to be”, imperative, numbers
from 0 to 100, Qs words( What / Where/ How/ How many…),“There is/There are…” and
furniture vocabulary.
- Read and understand the text about Lan’s family, Ss will be able to ask and answer
questions about jobs.
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially reading skill.
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’) - T calls 2 Ss to read the introduction of song’s famly.(may be sing that
song).- Then T corrects and gives marks.
III. New lesson: (35’)
******************************************************************************* 35
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Grammar: *TO BE:(7ms)
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 1-3 P.40
- Retell the forms of theVerbs : "To be”
Answer keys:
*Subjects: I/we/you/they/he/she/it 1./ am – am – are – is – are.
*To be: am/ is/ are.
2/Exercises: * word cues drill: 2./ am – is – is – are – are.
*Ex1-3(40) – T helps Ss do exercise
- T gets feedback. 3./ a) are – am; b) is – is.
c) is – isn’t ; d) are – aren’t.
- T explain and model: They are teachers. - Work individually.
They/teachers ; We/student ; She/ a nurse
He/ an engineer ; I/ a student ; They/ sister - Work in group to make sentences with
You/12 ; We/brother ; She/ a doctor To be.
-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play in two
groups by choosing the cue & making question.
-Corrects & comments the game. - Working in individual to fill in the gaps.
*IMPERATIVE:(10ms)- Asks S look at the
-Comparing in pairs & giving the
picture(p41) and answer the question in pairs. information.
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 4 P.40
-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in
individual to fill in the gaps. 4/Answer keys:
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs. a) come in ; b) sit down.
-Asks Ss to give the information. c) open your book ; e) stand up.
-Corrects & comments. d) close your book.
+Simon says *Answer keys:
*Question word:(10ms) a) What - is ; b) Do - live.
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 6 P.41. c) Who - is ; d) What - is.
– Retell the questions words they’ve learned Work in individially
* Answer keys: Song|s a student and he is 12.
There are 4 people in Song|s family : his farther,
his mother, his sister and him. His farther is name +Anwers key:
is Kien.He is 42 and he is a doctor. His mother|s 1.How old is Song?
name is Oanh. she is 39 years old and she is a 2.How many poeple are there in his
nurse. His siter|s name is Lan. She is 15 and she family?
is a student. 3.What is his farther|s name?
*Ex7(42)- Asks Ss to write the words for the 4.What does he do?
numbers & write the numbers for the words. 5.What is his mother|s name?
- Asks them to make questions for answer given: 6.How old is she?
a.12 b.4 c.Kien d.42 e.a doctor 7.what does do?
f.Oanh g.39 h.a nurse i.Lan J.a student 8.Whatis his sister|s name?
*Numbers:(5ms) 9.What does she do?
+Bingo: T reads: seventeen, seventy, eleven, one
hundred, thirty, sixteen, forty, fourteen, three, T- whole class

******************************************************************************* 36
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
nineteen....... SS choose 9 numbers
*Furniture:(10ms) – Elicits the picture quiz Work in groups
+Crossword Puzzle: - T explains how to play a
game.Grammar practice 10 P.43. Asks Ss fill in Work in pairs:
the picture quiz in group of 4. SSdraw their own pictures of furniture on
+Guessing game: example exchange: scrap of paper and ask following the
S1: Is it a TV?/ S2: No, it is not example exchange
S3:Is it a chair?/ S2: Yes, it is (Repeat)
+T/F repetition drill: picture B5 P.37 (Silent)
There is a TV./ There are 3 stools (Repeat)
There are 4 people (Repeat)
There are 2 armchairs and 2 chairs (Silent)
There are 7 books./ There are 2 lamps (Silent)
There is a lamp./ (Repeat)
There is a steeo and a telephone (Repeat
IV.Consolidation:(2ms)- T sums up the main contents of this lesson
- Check the form : “How many......?/ There is/are....”
V.Homework:(1m)
- Complete all the exercises 1→ 10(p 40-43). Review from Unit 1 to Unit 3.
Prepare to do a test of next lesson.

WEEK 6:
Date of preparing: 25/9/2010 - Date of teaching: 02/ 10/ 2010.
Period 18

Written test (45’)
English 6. No 1

A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:- To Help Ss have a chance to test their knowledge of English in units1,2,3.
II.Objectives:
- By the end of the test, ss will be able to know their knowledge about units 1,2,3.
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan,paper tests.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, pens and some school things
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up
III/ The contents of the test
Kiểm tra lấy đề phòng ra.

*Đề tham khảo
I.C hoose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)
1.This is my..........................
******************************************************************************* 37
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
a.hello b.hi c.family d.fine
2.We are in the .............................
a.living room b.window c.table d.door
3.There are four.................in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and
I.
a.dogs b.people c.window d.chairs
4. My mother is thirty-five....................old.
a.year b.years c.age d.ages
5. She is a...................
a.doctors b.engeneer c.teachers d.student
6. We.........................on Tran Hung Dao street..
a.address b.is c.live d.are
7. ........................are you? I am fine, thanks.
a.Where b.what c.How d.Who
8. Is this .................... friend? -Yes, he’s my friend.
a.his b.her c.my d.your
9. This is.................eraser ?
a. on b. an c. a d.in
10. What is your......................? -My name is Lan.
a.name b.student c.teacher d.friend

III.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)

A B
1.What is this? a. Yes,it is.
2.Are these your b. It’s a book.
pens?
3.Is that your house? c.I live on Tran Phu street.
4.Who is that? d. No, it isn’t. It’s his
ruler
5.Where do you live? e. No, there aren’t.
6. Is this your ruler? f. That’s Mai

III. Write the dialogues in the correct order. (3ms)Children: We’re fine, thank
you. How are you?
Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children.
Children: Bye.
Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan.
******************************************************************************* 38
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Miss Hoan: How are you today?
Children: ..........................................................................
Miss Hoan: .........................................................................
Children: ..........................................................................
Miss Hoan: ........................................................................
Children: .........................................................................
Miss Hoan: .......................................................................

II.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )
a. 15 = ......................................; c. 28 = .............................................
b. 30 = .......................................; d. 59 = ...........................................

V.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms)
1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.
..........................................................................................
2 . / my / this /teacher / is / .
.........................................................................................
3. / an / he / engineer / is /.
...........................................................................................
4. /name/ her/ is / Nga/.
..........................................................................................
WEEK 7:
Date of preparing: 30/9/2010 - Date of teaching: 04 / 10/ 2010.
Period 19

Unit 4: Big Or small
Lesson 1: A 1-4
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:- To Help Ss read and understand the paragraphs about phong’s school and
Thu’s school, practise the possessive case( so huu cach), Yes/ No questions. and “or” qs.
Develop reading skill.
II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read the paragraphs about
Thong’s school and Thu’s school fluently.
Ss know how to describe location and size of school, use possessive case: N’s+ N ; Yes/ No
Qs; “or” qs and Where is your school? In the country
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially reading skill.
B/ Preparation:

******************************************************************************* 39
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: No check.
III.New lesson: (38’)
- Today, We’re going to read the paragraphs about Phong’s school and Thu’s school.
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
I/Pre teach: (Vocabulary)(7’)
-Big:(realia) to, lớn
-Small:(realia) nhỏ, bé Listen and repeat in chorus and
-In the city(Picture): ở thành phố individially
-In the country: (Picture)Ở nông thôn Copy down
-Or : hoặc , hay.(trans)
 Is your school in the country or in the city?
(Trg học của bạn ở miền quê hay ở thành phố?)
+Checking: R & R.
* A1(44).(4’)
*Pre-reading:
+ Matching(T hangs a poster).
-T sets the scene: Use 2 pictures.T runs through the
words/ phrases:
Big Phong|s school small Read the text and check their preditions
In the country Thu’s School In the city
Work in groups(Answer the questions in
-Ask Ss to share their ideas with their partners. A2 P.44 from a to d
- Get feedback.
II/ While-reading:(20’) Work in groups.
- Ask Ss to read A1,3(p.44-45) Then to check their *Keys:
predictions. a) Yes, It is b) No, it isn’t.
c) It’s in the country./ d) No, itisn’t.
- Get feedback. *S1:Is Phong|s school small?
*Comprehention Qs(p.44).T runs through 4 S2:Yes, it is
questions. Ask Ss to read A1 again and answer S1:Is Thu|s school small?
questions in pairs. S2:No, it is not.
Get feedback.(give answer keys).  Form: Tobe + S + ..?
-Yes, S+ tobe./No, S + tobe+not.
*Ex A3(p.45) – Ss read the paragraph again &
* To be + S + … or ….?
answer Qs in pairs(There are 4 qs).
- Chọn 1 trong 2 để trả lời.
-Get feedback.
 a)There are eight. *Where is your school?- It is in the …
 b)There are 400 * Formation of possessive case:
 c)There are twenty - sở hữu cách với “ 'S” chỉ dùng cho

******************************************************************************* 40
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
 d)There are nine hundred. người và con vật,được đặt sau danh từ
III/Post reading(8ms) chỉ quyền sở hữu.
Ex 4(46)-Elicit model sentences: eg: Mary’s house, Thu’s book…
Yes/No qs and Or qs. Then answer the qs.  N’s+ S
 Practice: In pairs using word cues: Note:
+Yes/ no questions answer drill: - Nếu chủ từ là số ít, ta viết: “ 'S”
Phong|s school - Nếu chủ từ là số nhiều ta viết “ S' ”.
Thu|s school In the country?
Eg: Parents' bag/ Lan’s ruler…
Your school Big/ small?
|
Your brother s school In the city? - Ss copy down. Work individually.
Your sister|s school
- T checks some pairs, and corrects.

VI.Consolidation:(2ms)
- Retell the main points of this lesson.
- How to describe location and size of school, possessive case, Y/N qs and or qs.

V.Homework:(2ms)
- Ss learn by heart vocabu,read A1-3 again.
- Do exercises A2-3(44-45)
-Write Y/N qs using word cues in post reading.
-Prepare for next lesson.



WEEK 7:
Date of preparing: 30/9/2010 - Date of teaching: 05 / 10/ 2010.
Period 20

Unit 4: Big Or small
Lesson 2: B1-5
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:- To Help Ss listen to the dialogue betweenThu and Phong; ordinal numbers
from 1st to 10th ; “Which” - qs. Develop Ss’ 4 skills, especially listening skill.
II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen and understand the
contents of the dialogue between Thu and Phong. They are talking about their schools and
their classes.Ss understand “which” – qs; ordinal numbers from 1st to 10th .
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially listening skill.
B/ Preparation: T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.

******************************************************************************* 41
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II.Checking up(5’) Warm up:
 Pelmanism: I Thu He You She // His My Your Her Thu|s
Ask 3 Ss to make qs and answer using word cues:
a)Ha’s school/ big ? / yes.
b)Your house/ in the city? / No.
c) Your school/ big or small?/ small.
Keys: a) Is Ha’s school big? – Yes, it is. b) Is your house in the city ? – No, it isn’t.
c) Is your school is big or small? – it’s small.
- T corrects and give them marks
III.New lesson: (35’)Today, We’re going to listen to the dialogue between Thu and
Phong about their schools and classes.
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1/ Pre teach( vocabulary)(7’) T elicits vocabulary
and ordinal numbers: Listen and repeat in chorus and
-Floor(n) sàn nhà, tầng.(Trans)(The first floor:tầng 1) individially
-Grade(n): Khối lớp(trans) Copy down
The sixth floor: (Picture):tầng 6 Work in groups of 3.

-Listen to and guess.
-Work individually.

-Ss listen and check their
predictions.
-Ss share their ideas with their
*Check: matching. partners
2. Pre-Listening: (8’) B1(p.47): T hangs a poster. Ss work in pairs
+Predict dialogue:T sets the scene: Thu and
Phong are talking to each other about their school
and classes.
Then model sentences:- give form.
-Show the dialogue with some missing words.
-Ss guess the missing words individually.
*Thu: Hello, which grade are you in?
Phong:I am in grade...........(1).........
Thu: And which class are you in? *Model sentences:
Phong:......(2)..............What about you? Which + n+ tobe+…?
Thu: Iam in grade...(3)...,class...(4)..... It’s/I’m…
How many floors does your school have? * Where is her/his classroom?
Phong:..(5)................It is asmall school. It is on the first floor.
Thu: My school has ....(6)......floors and my classroom is
on the ...(7).....floor.
Where is your classroom? *practice:
Phong: It is on the...(8)...floor. S1: Which grade is Thu in?
-Ask Ss share with theirs partners. S2:She is in grade 6
T gets feedback. S1: Which class is Thu in?
While listening:(13’)Asks ss to listen the text B1 S2:She is in class 6A
S1:Where is her classroom?
******************************************************************************* 42
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
P.47 to correct their predictions. S2:It is on the first floor.
-Get feedback
Keys: 1.6 / 2.6A/ 3.7/ 4.7C/  Give answer keys.
5.two/ 6.four/ 7.second/ 8.first. - Listen and check.
*Grid: B2 P.48: Complete the table. T runs through - Give ideas.
the table.Ask Ss listen to the tape again and fill in - Look at the text book .
the table. - Listen and fill the table.
Get feedback. - Work individually.
Name Grade class Classroom’s floor
Thu 7 7C 2nd Ss write 3 sentences about
Phong 6 6A 1st themselves
You 6 6E 1st Work individaully. Then read
3.Post listening:(7’)* Ex 3(p.48):-Write it up aloud.
Eg: I’m in grade 6.I’m in class 6E. My school has 2
floors and my classroom is on the first floor. -Work in pairs.
-Call 2 or 3 Ss to read their writings loudly. Give answer keys:
- T corrects. 1.small/ 2.does/ 3.has/ 4.are/
*Ex 5(P.48)- Complete the dialogue 5am/ 6.is/ 7.on.
Ask Ss look at the dialogue in the text book:(have 7
gaps).Ask Ss fill in the dialogue.
Get feedback.
IV/Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson.
*T sums up: Ordinal numbers/ Which grade/class are you in? – I’m in grade/class…
Which floor is your classroom? – It’s on the … floor.
V/ Homework:- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar. Do exercises B1,3,5.
- Prepare for next lesson.

WEEK 7:
Date of preparing: 02/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 09/10/2010.
Period 21

Unit 4: Big Or small
Lesson 3: C 1-2.Getting ready for school.
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:- To Help Ss use the vocabulary of routines to talk about habitual(thoi
quen)actions, make positive statement with “I”, use simple present tense .
II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use simple present tense with the
first person(singulara) and vocabulary of routines: Iget up.I get dressed….
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially listening skill.
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.

******************************************************************************* 43
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
 T calls some Ss to answer the questions:
1. which grade are you in?. / Which class are you in?. / 3.Which floor are you in?
Keys:1. I’m in gade 6; 2. I’m inclass 6C/D/E; 3. It’s on the first floor.
- T corrects and give them marks
III.New lesson: (35’)
Today, We learn how to describe everyday activitives.
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation:(8ms)
+Pre teach(vocabulary)Use the pictures on p.49
(to)get up: Thức dậy (visual)
(to)Get dressed: mặc quần áo (picture)
(to)brush my/your teeth:đánh răng của tôi/bạn(mime)
(to)wash my face:rửa mặt của tôi(mime)
(to)have breakfast:ăn sáng(picture)
(to)go to school: đi học(trans)
*Check: Matching
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
2*Presentation text: C1.P.49(10’)
-Dialogue build: set the scene: A friend wants to - Repeat the words in chorus & in
know about your routines. individual.
T elicits dialogue and write on the bb - Give the meaning & the
+Model sentences: pronunciation.
A:What do you do every morning? - Copy the words Correcting the
B: I get up mistakes.
brush my teeth Listen and repeat in chorus and
have breakfast individially
* Concept check: meaning, form,use.
Copy down
*Form:
What do + s(we/you/they) + do…?
S(we/you/they)+ V + …
*Use: Ask and answer about your friend routines
- Read the dialogue in individual.
3/Practice:(10ms)
-Correct the pronunciation.
a.Word cue drill:T runs through the cues and
models:
S1:What do you do every morning?
S2:I get up Work in pairs to practice the form:
S2:What do you do then? Work in pairs to practice the model
S1:...... sentences:
.................up ... . .. .dressed ............teeth

......... .....face .... . .breakfast ..........school EX:

******************************************************************************* 44
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
S1:What do you do every morning?
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to S2:I get up
practice.Reads the first model for example & asks Ss S2:What do you do then?
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups -Ss work in group of 7.s
& in pairs . - Repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
b.Write it up: C3 P.49 - Make sentences for the next cues.
+Write 5 sentences about what YOU do every
morning. Begin with: - Practice in groups & in pairs .
Every morning, I get up. Then I............ -Correct the pronunciation.
*Further practice:(7ms)
+Chain game: -Work in pairs to practice the
S1:I get up exchange
S2: I get up and brush my teeth - Play in pairs & correcting the
S3: I get up, brush my teeth and I get dressed mistakes.
S4:..................
-T checks some groups and corrects. - Practise speaking in groups of 4

IV/Consolidation(1’):
- Retell the main points of this lesson.
- T sums up the main contents of the lesson: talk about routines
V/ Homework(1’):
- Ss learn vocabulary and newstructure by heart
- Write 4 sentences telling what they do every morning( I get up.I get dressed. Then I…
- Prepare for next lesson.

WEEK 8:
Date of preparing: 08/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 11/10/2010.
Period 22

Tr¶ vµ ch÷a bµi KiÓm tra
A/The aims and the objectives:
- Help Ss know their test rerult and find out their mistakes and draw out their experiences
for the next tests.
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to do a test correctly and correct
their mistakes.Ss consolidate their knowledge from unit 1 to unit 3.
- Develop Ss’ skills of doing a test.
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan,Keys of the test, posters.
Ss’: Revise units 1-2-3.
C/ Procedure:

******************************************************************************* 45
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
• T calls some Ss to answer the questions:
1.which grade are you in?. / 2.Which class are you in?. / 3.Which floor are you in?
• What do you do every morning?
Keys:1. I’m in gade 6; 2. I’m inclass 6C/D/E; 3. It’s on the first floor.
- I get up / I brush my teeth. / …
- T corrects and give them marks
III. Contents:
- T gives the aims of the lesson.
- Remarks in general( good and bad points)
A/ Good points: - Đại đa số các em biết cách trình bày bài kiểm tra,biết cách trình bày dạng
bài tập,Trình bày sạch sẽ khoa học(nêu tên 1 số em tiêu biểu).
Nhiều học sinh làm bài tốt,viết chữ đẹp, đạt điểm cao.
B/ Bad points:
Bên cạnh các em tốt cũng có nhiều em viết chữ còn quá ẩu, tẩy xóa nhiều trong bài kiểm
tra,hiện tương dùng bút xóa tràn lan. Một số bạn chưa chăm học, những cấu trúc câu, ngữ
pháp không thuộc nên không áp dụng để làm bài tập, bài tập chia động từ Tobe chưa thạo,
cách chuyển ngôi chưa tốt, dẫn đến điểm chưa cao( nêu tên những trường hợp điểm kém,
cụ thể tên)
-Cần rút kinh nghiệm cho những bài tập sau này.
* Giáo viên trả bài và chữa bài cho học sinh (T gives the test back to students and correct the
test).
C/ Answer keys:
- Đáp án của bài kiểm tra của phòng giáo dục.

WEEK 8:
Date of preparing: 09/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 12/10/2010.
Period 23

Unit 4: Big Or small
Lesson 4: C 1-3,6.Getting ready for school.
A/The aims and the objectives:
I.The aims:- To Help Ss make positive statements with “ He/She’’ to talk about present
habitual actions.
II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make positive statements with
“He/She’’ to talk about present habitual actions fluently(hanh dong thoi quen).
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently.
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.

******************************************************************************* 46
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: Test 15’
III.New lesson: (30’)

Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Vocabulary: revision (6’)
Explain about the way changes from “ my” Listen and repeat.
become “ his/ her/ your”.
- (to) brush your teeth / his/her teeth Copy down on the notebook.
- (to) wash your/his / her face. - Listen and repeat.
- (to) say “hello” to classmate.
2.Presentation: (8’) - Look at the pictures and
*Presentation text: C1 practise, give model sentences.
- T elicits the pictures and text.
Elicit model sentences and write on bb.
 Model sentences:
S1: What does Ba/ he/she do every morning?
S2: Ba gets up. He brushes his teeth.
She has breakfast.
She goes to school.
- Explain the use and form:
 Form:

What does + he/she + do …?
He / She + V-s/es.

*Practice : Word cue drill (8’)
- Copy.
-…….... up - …….dressed - ………teeth Ss ask and answer about Ba
- ……..face - …..breakfast - ……school
- Read loudly.
- … His classroom - …hello to his classmates

-Run through those cues.
*Model: ask and answer about Ba
T : What does he do every morning? - Listen and repeat.
Ss: He gets up.
T : What does he do then?
Ss: He gets dressed.
- Help ss practice speaking: T – WC , half – - Practise speaking.
half , open pairs , closed pairs.
*Correct Ss’pronunciation os other errors if
necessary.


******************************************************************************* 47
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
3.Production: C3-6 : Write it up. (6’) -Write individually. Ss to write 5
- Ask ss to write 5 sentences about Ba. sentences about Ba. Begin with:
Begin with: Every morning, Ba gets up. He
Every morning, Ba gets up. He gets gets dressed …
dressed …
- Let Ss write individually. -One St to go to the board to write
- Correct Ss’ mistakes. about Ba.
- Others to write on their
notebook.

IV. Consolidation: (1’)
Retell the main points of this lesson.
- Sum up the main content of the lesson:
What does he/ she do ….?
He/She + V-s/es…

V. Homework: (1’)
- Ss finish their writing , learn by heart structues.
- Do exercises in workbook.
- Prepare for next lesson.




WEEK 8:
Date of preparing:10/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 13/10/2010.
Period 24

Unit 4: Big Or small
Lesson 5: C 4,5,7.Getting ready for school.
A/The aims and the objectives:
- To Help Ss practise telling the time.
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to practise asking and answering about the time
fluently: What time is it? – It’s ten fifteen/ half past ten/ ten o’clock.
- Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently(expecially speaking)
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise numbers.
C/ Procedure:

******************************************************************************* 48
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: - Ask 2 SS to answer the Qs :
1. What does Ba do every morning?
2. What does he do then?
*keys: 1. He gets up
2. He gets dressed.
- T corrects ,remark and give marks.
- Revise the cardinal numbers: one/ two / three…
III.New lesson(35’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation:(5ms)
+Number dictation:T reads and Ss write : one ten, Work in individially
fourty thirty, five twenty, three fifteen, six forty,
seven forty five, ten thrirty, twelve twenty five,
eleven fifty, two fifty five.
+Pre teach(Vocabulary): (9’) Listen and repeat in chorus and
-The time: thời gian(example) individially
-Ten oclock: 10 giờ đúng(trans) Copy down
-half past ten: 10 giờ 30’, 10 rưỡi.( visual)
-(to) be late for: trễ, muộn.(situation)
-Past: qua, hơn.(trans) - Repeat the words in chorus & in
*Eg .“We are late for school” individual.
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
using the situation. - Give the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Copy the words Correcting the
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). mistakes
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the Work in groups.
mistakes.
+Checking: What and where
2*Presentation dialoguge : C4 P.50.(7’)
-Set the scene: Hoa meets Ba at the schoolgate.
Ss listen to the dialogue between Hoa and Ba then
repeat aloud.
+Model sentenses:
S1: What time is it?
S2:It is eight oclock / eight fifty/ half past eight. - Copy down the new structures .
Use: Ask and answer about the time. - Work individually.
3.Practice:(12’) * Cách trả lời giờ đúng
a/ Ask & answer about the timeusing a clock( with It’s + số giờ + o’clock.
different period of time): ex :9.00 - It’s nine o’clock
2.10 ; 1.30 ; 11.0 ; 9.45 ; 5.15; 8.25. … * cách trả lời giờ hơn
* Model: - What is the time? / What time is it? It’s + số giờ + số phút
It’s two ten. ex: 6.20 – It’s six twenty
- Practise asking answering about the time: * Cách trả lời giờ rưỡi
T-WC; half- half; open pairs, close pairs. It’s half past + số giờ
******************************************************************************* 49
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
b/ Word cues drill: Run through the cues: ( It’s + số giờ + thirty)
Get up / 5.45 Go to school / 6.15 ex: 8.30 – It’s half past eight.
( It’s eight thirty )
Have breakfast / 6.00 Go home / 10.00
Listen and repeat in chorus and
*Model:S1:What time do you get up? individially.
S2:At five fourty-five
*Further practice:(8ms)C7(51)( Work in pairs to practice example
-Write the answer . exchange.
- Ask Ss to read C6(51) again. - Repeat in chorus & in individual.
Translates C6 in to vietnamese - Make sentences for the next cues.
Ask Ss to write the answer of C7 in - Practice in groups & in pairs .
notebook.(about themselves) -Correct the pronunciation.
Eg: + I get up at …
+ I have breakfast at … Work in pairs to practice
+Noughts and crosses:(If have more time)
6.10 6.30 4.45 Work in groups to ask and answer the
7.00 11.00 11.30 questions about the time
3.15 8.20 9.40
III.Consolidation:(2ms) - Asks Ss to give the questions & answer to talk about the time.
What time is it ?- It’s ten o’clock / ten fifteen / half past ten.
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
IV.Homework:(1m)- Study the model exchange.
- Exercise: write about your family member’s routines.
- Prepare the picture on page 52 & the things you usually do in a day.
-Do number 3 P.41/4 P.42.

WEEK 9:
Date of preparing:13/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 18/10/2010.
Period 25

Revision
A/The aims and the objectives:
- To Help Ss consolidate the structure and vocabulary in unit 4. To help practise writing and
speaking skills.
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to practise using structures fluently:
Where is/are…? It is /They are ….in (the)…
How many + Ns + are there …? There are../There is …+so luong + N(s).
Which grade/class/floor + are you in? I’m in …
Present simple tense(ordinary Verb) : S+V(s/es)…
Asking and answering about the time:What time is it? – It’s ten fifteen/ half past ten/o’clock.
-Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently(expecially speaking and writing skills)
B/ Preparation:

******************************************************************************* 50
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (8’)- Ask 2 SS to answer the Qs :
1.What does Ba do every morning? What does he do then?
2. Ask and answer the Qs about the time:Ba/ get up/ 6.00.
*keys: 1. He gets up/ He gets dressed.
2. What time does Ba get up? –He gets up at 6.00
- T corrects ,remark and give marks.
III.New lesson(34’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
I/Revision: (14’)main structures in unit 4 -Ss retell the main structures grammar of
- Ask Ss to give main structures in unit 4 uint 4.
1.Numbers:(ordinal numbers) from 1st to 10th .
- Work individually.
- One st read & one st write ordinal numbers on bb
T corrects.
2.How many…?- Ask Ss to give the form:
How many + N(s/es)+ are there..? - Working in individual to fill in the gaps.
There is one/a (n)/There are + số lượng+ N(s/es).
3.Where is/are…?It’s../They are in(the)… -Comparing in pairs & giving the
4.Which class/grade/floor are you in?I’m in… information.
5.Present simple tense(ordinary verb): Eg:- I get up.
Ask Ss give the form: S+ V(s/es)… He gets up
*I/we/you/they/Lan and Ba + V
Work in individially
*He/ she/it/Mai+ V(s/es) - Work in group to make sentences with
- Give example To be.
II/Exercises( 9’) - Do the exercises.
*Ex1: Put the verbs in the correct form:
– T helps Ss do the exercises,run through
sentences.
1. He(have) breakfast at 6.10
2. Miss Nga ( brush) her teeth at 5.45 EX2:Anwers the questions:
3. She (wash) her face at 5.50. 1.How old is your father?(40)
4. She( go) to school at 6.55. 2.How many poeple are there in his
family?(4)
5. She (get) dressed at 6.20 3.What is your farther|s name?
6. Mr.Minh (live) with his family in the country. 4.What does he do?(farmer)
7. Mai and Ba(go) to school at 6.40 5.What is your mother|s name?
-Ss do the execises individually 6.How old is she?(35)
7.what does she do?(farmer)

******************************************************************************* 51
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- T gets feedback. 8.What is your brother/sister|s name?
-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play in two 9.What does he/she do?(student)
groups by choosing the cue & making question. 10.Where is your school?(city)
-Corrects & comments the game. 11.Is it big or small?(big)
12. How many Ss are there in your
*IMPERATIVE(4’)Asks S look at the picture(p41) classroom?(30)
13.What time do you go to school?(6.15)
and answer the question in pairs.
14.Which floor are you in?
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 4 P.40
-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in
individual to fill in the gaps. T- whole class
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs. SS choose 9 numbers
-Asks Ss to give the information. Work in groups
-Corrects & comments.
Work in pairs:
*Question word:(6ms) SSdraw their own pictures of furniture on
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 6 P.41. scrap of paper and ask following the
– Retell the questions words they’ve learned example exchange
*Ex7(42)- Asks Ss to write the words for the
numbers & write the numbers for the words.
- Asks them to make questions for answer given:

IV/ Consolidation: (1’)
-Retell the main points of this lesson.
V/ Homework(1’)
- Do all exercises, learn by heart vocab and some structures grammar.
- Prepare for next lesson.

WEEK 9:
Date of preparing:15/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 19/10/2010.
Period 26

Unit 5 : Thing I do
Lesson 1: A1-2.My day

A/The aims and the objectives:
- To Help Ss revise how to describe everyday routines with subject “I”, “she”, Ss ask and
answer about what a person does everyday.
Develop 4 skills correctly and fluently.
-By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able touse present simple tense to describeeveryday
routines with “I,She” . Ss practise asking answering about what a person does everyday
fluently:+ What does she/ he do every day / every morning / every afternoon?
She / he + V(s/es)…
-Ss practise 4 skills fluently.
******************************************************************************* 52
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
B/ Preparation: -Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (10’) *Warm up: T give cues, Ss make some qs and answer:
5.56’ 12.30’ 2.9’ 2.55’ 5.4’
Model:What time is it?
It’s five-fifty six
-T asks some Qs about the time
- Ask 2 SS to answer the Qs :
1.What time do you go to school?
2. What time does Ba go to school?
*keys: 1. I go to school at …
2. He goes to school at ….
- T corrects ,remark and give marks.
III.New lesson(34’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation:(7ms) Copy down
+Pre teach:(Vocabulary)-T elicits vocabulary on the - Repeat in chorus . Work in individual.
board. - Correcting the mistakes.
(to) play games: chơi trò chơi (situation)
(to) do your homework: làm bài tập của (bạn) - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
my
her
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps
SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. Everyday (6.00) Every morning(6.30)
+Checking: Slap the board together with:
go to school / Have breakfast / Get up
*Presentation text: (8’)A1 P.52(picturer story)
- T elicits 4 pictures.
Help Ss tell a story using subject: “ I ”
Eg: Every day I get up at 6.00.. … Every afteroon(15.30) Everyevening(19.30)
Every evening I do my homework. ….
- Ask Ss to tell a story using subject “Nga” - Reading the dialogue in individual.
Eg:Everyday Nga gets up at six …. - Answer the questions, work in pairs
Help Ss read and listen to A1 *Model
2/A2 P.53 a-d: (7’)T run through the questions  Everyday I go to school.
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to she goes
answer. Then give the keys.
 Questions: In the Ss’book + S + V / V(s/es)…
- Revision:Use present simple tense to talk about -Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the

******************************************************************************* 53
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
somebody’s routines then ask Ss give model . keys:
3.Practice(5’) 1./ Everyday she gats up .
* EX4:Substituation drill( hang poster) 2./ Everyday morning she goes to school.
- Help Ss say out a St’s routines as follows: 3./ Everyday afternoon she plays games.
Everyday, I get up at six o’clock. 4./ Everyday evening she does her
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to homeworks.
practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
in pairs . - Making sentences for the next cues.
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
Teacher :Every day I get up at six Students :Every day Nga gets up at 6
I brush my teeth / I wash my face/ I get dressed She brushes her teeth
I have breakfast / I go to school / I play games She washes her face……
I do my homework.
3.Production:(5ms)+Survey: *Play game Do your home work
S1: What time do you get up? 4.30 7.00
S2: 5.30
Name Get up Have breakfast
Vien 5.30 6.15
..... .....
IV.Consolidation:(2ms)- Retell the main points of this lesson.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Write it up: Or ss orally report back:
Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen
V.Homework:(1m)
- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.
- Write about your daily routine, using the substitution drill.
- Prepare the picture on page 53 for next lesson.

WEEK 9:
Date of preparing:15/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 21/10/2010.
Period 27

Unit 5 : Thing I do
Lesson 2: A3-4.My day

A/The aims and the objectives:
- To Help Ss use questions and answers with subjects “she/he” to talk about
somebody’s routines(present simple tense).
Develop 4 skills correctly and fluently.
-By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to ask and answer fluently with:
+ What does she/ he do every day / every morning / every afternoon?
She / he + V(s/es)…
-Ss practise 4 skills fluently.

******************************************************************************* 54
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
B/ Preparation: -Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’)
- Ask SS to give the correct form of the verbs:
1. She (have) breakfast at 6.30
2. I (play) games every afternoon.
3. He (do) his homwork every evening.
4. She (wash) her face / She (get) dressed.
*Keys: 1.has / 2.play / 3. Does / 4. Washes/gets.
- T corrects ,remark and give marks.
III.New lesson(34’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation:(12ms) Listen and repeat in chorus . Work
+Pre teach(Vocabulary) – Elicit vocabulary individially
(1)(to) listen to music:(picture): nghe nhạc Copy down
(3)(to) watch T.V: :(picture) xem ti vi
(2)(to) do the housework:(picture) làm công việc nhà - Copying down the words listening
(4) (to) read: :(picture): đọc to the sentences & take note the
+Checking: ordering right order.
+Ordering vocabulary: - Checking & correcting
T reads: Every morning, Lan gets up and listen to Answer keys:
music. every afternoon she comes home and does the 1..(to) listen to music
housework. then she watches T.V . Every evening she 3. (to) watch TV
reads and does her homework. 2.(to) do the houseworks
+Presentation text:(5’) A3 P.53:(Here are some Ss 4.(to) read
and their routines after school. - Reading the dialogue in individual.
- Ask and answer about the routines after school -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. *Model sentence:
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual. - What does Ba do after school ?
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. He watches TV.
*Form:-What do/does + S + do + after school?
S+ V / V(s/es)…
2.Practice:(10ms)
+Picture drill: A3 P.53.-T run through the cues
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
*Model: A:What do you do after school?
B: I watch TV.
A:What deos Lan do after school?
B:She do his homework.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat
in chorus & in individual.
******************************************************************************* 55
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Repeating in chorus & in
- Practices with Ss & checks Ss’ practicing in groups & individual.
in pairs . - Making sentences for the next
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. cues.
3.Further practice:(7ms) - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
+Noughts and crosses: - Correcting the pronunciation.
He/play games She/brush her Lan/ do the Model sentence:
teeth house work - What does [Ba / Lan…] do after
Ba/ get dressed Nam/ go to Thu/ do her school ?
school homework –[ He/She] watches TV.
She/ wash her He/ Have Mai/listen to - Working in groups to choose the
face breakfast music cue & make the question & the
*Example exchange: answer.
S1: What does Ba do every morning? Teacher- whole class
S2: [ He gets dresses ].

IV.Consolidation:(2ms)- Retell the main points of this lesson.
-Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about other’s daily routine:
- What does [Ba/Lan…] do after school ?
–[ He/She] watches TV.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Write it up: Or ss orally report back:
Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen.
V.Homework:(1m)
- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.
- Write about your family members daily routine.
- Prepare the picture on page 54 & 56.

WEEK 10:
Date of preparing:19/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 25/10/2010.
Period 28

Unit 5 : Thing I do
Lesson 3: A5-6.My day
A/The aims and the objectives:
- To Help Ss practise simple present tense with “yes/no questions” to talk about
somebody’s routines.
Develop 4 skills .
-By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to practise the simple present tense with
“yes/No” questions to talk about routines fluently.
Do/Does + s + V(infi)..?- Yes,s+ do/does. No,S+ donot/doesnot.
-Ss practise 4 skills fluently.
B/ Preparation: -Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.

******************************************************************************* 56
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’)
III.New lesson(34’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
*Revision:(3ms)+Pelmasim:
Work in 2 groups
1. Go to do listen to watch - Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
2. school homework music TV individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
1.Presentation:(12ms) - Copying the words.
+Pre teach: (Vocabulary)
(to) play volleyball: Chơi bóng chuyền
(to) play football (soccer):Đá bóng
(to) play sports: Chơi thể thao
(a) girl: Cô gái, cô bé, bạn gái
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using
the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss
to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words pairs.
+Checking: R.O.R -Correcting the pronunciation.
+Presentation dialogue: A5 P.54: Show the pictures
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. *Model sentence:
- Asks Ss practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs.  Do you / they play volleyball ?
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to practice in  -Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.
groups & in pairs.  Does she / he play soccer ?
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.  -Yes, she / he does ; No, she / he
+Grid: asks ss to read the dialogue and make a grid about doesn’t
Nga, Thu, Lan, Vui, girls with answer key(*) -Filling in the table in individual,
 Survey: correcting
Name Volleyball Football
Vui 
Nga 
Lan 
Thu 
2.Practice:(20ms)
+Yes/ no question answer drill: A6 P.53.Show a picture
then Introduce the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in
chorus & in individual. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation.

******************************************************************************* 57
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. Example exchange:
Example exchange: S1: Do you / they play volleyball ?
a,S1:Do you play sports? S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.
S2: Yes, I do/ No, I don|t S1: Does she / he play soccer ?
3.Further practice:(7ms) S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he
doesn’t
Find someone who? Name opinions
...watches T.V Ba √
...Plays football - Working in to work in individual to
...does the housework interview each other by making the Yes /
...Plays volleyball No question & fill the information in the
...listen to music table.
...reads - Going around & ask the other to get the
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual to information to fill the information in the
interview each other by making the Yes / No question & fill table
the information in the table. Example exchange:
-Examples with Ss & fill the information in the table . S1:Do you watch T.V?
- Asks Ss to go around & ask the other. S2: Yes, I do
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in S1: What is your name?
pairs . S2:{........}
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S1: How do you spell it?
S2: ........
III.Consolidation:(1m)
- Retell the main contents of the lesson.
- Ask Ss give the form of yes/ no questions
IV.Homework:(1m)
- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structures grammar.
- Do exercises in workbook
- Prepare for next lesson.

WEEK 10:
Date of preparing:19/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 25/10/2010.
Period 29

Unit 5 : Thing I do
Lesson 4: B1-3

A/The aims and the objectives:
- To Help Ss read and understand a picture story about Ba’s daily activities using present
simple tense. Develop 4 skills.
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice simple present tense by reading a
picture story about Ba|s daily routines
-Ss practise 4 skills fluently.
B/ Preparation: - Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4

******************************************************************************* 58
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’) – Questions: Ask Ss to ask and answer using Yes/No qs.
1.You / listen to music / yes
2. She / play / volleyball / No
*Keys: 1. Do you listen to music ? Yes, I do.
2. Does she play volleyball? No, she does not.
- Corrects , remarks and give marks.
III.New lesson(34’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
*Revision:(3ms)+Jumbled words:
- okhueowsr= housework Work in 4 groups
- tislen= listen / - ader= Read
- ypal= Play / - cthaw= Watch
1.Pre- reading Listen and repeat in chorus and
*Pre teach :(Vocabulary) individially
(to) take a shower: tắm vòi hoa sen(picture) Copy down
(to) eat: ăn (mine) Work in groups
(to) start: bắt đầu (meaning) -Guessing the times on which Ba does
(to) finish :kết thúc (antonym of start) his daily routine & fill in the table part 2
(to) have lunch :ăn trưa (picture) on page 57.
(to) go to bed: đi ngủ (picture) - Compare with their partners.
(a) Quarter: 1/4 , 15 phút ( explain)
+Checking: what and where
+Open predition:B2 P.57: Set the scene: You are going to
read about Ba’s routines.(Run through the table(57)
-Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to guess the times on
which Ba does his daily routine & fill in the table part 2 on p 57.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
- Get feedback.
Presentation text: B2 – P56.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Asks Ss check their prediction.
- Corrects & comments.
Grid: B2 – P57.
-Asks Ss to read the dialogue in & fill in the table in individual.
2. While reading:(15ms)
+Read the text about Ba & check their predictions.
To fill in the tables about Ba and Their friends(you) - Giving their prediction.
Get feedback - Reading the text .
3.Post reading:(8ms)* B3(57) Questions and answers - Checking the prediction.
+ Ask ss to complete the last column in the B2 table(about me)
+Asks ss to do B3.P.57 – Read questions loudly. Action Time
-Gives the requirement & ask Ss to work in groups of tables to Ba You
ask each other the questions : Get up 6.00 6.15
a./ What time does Ba get up / Go to school / have classes / Go to school 6.45
Have lunch / Go home / Go to bed ? Classes start 7.000
b./ What time do you get up / Go to school / have classes / Classes finish 11.15
Have lunch / Go home / Go to bed ? Have lunch 11.30
& fill the answers in the box on the grid .
******************************************************************************* 59
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to report the information about their friends. Go home 5pm
-Corrects & comments. Go to bed 10pm
a) Answer: -Filling in the table in individual,
+ Ba get(s) up at 6.00. correcting .
go(es) to school 6.45. Read the text in individially
has/have classes 7.00 – 11.15. Work in pairs
+ I has / have lunch 11.30. Work in individially
go(es) home 5.00. Work in pairs
go(es) to bed 10.00 * Survey:
-Working in groups to ask each other
b)Survey:-Ss use qs in B3-b to ask their friends to fill in the the questions fill the answers in the box
table B2 about “Me” on the grid
- Get feedback - Reporting the information about their
Eg: What time do you get up? friends.
I get up at half past five.

III.Consolidation:(2ms)
- Asks the form of yes/ no question
- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do the daily
routine:- What time does Ba get up ?
- He gets up
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
IV.Homework:(1m)
- Study the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do
the daily routine. Do Exercise: write the time on which your family members do their daily
routines ( base on the table B2 P 57).Write a passage about themselves using the
informations in column “me” of B2.
- Prepare the picture on page 58 for next lesson.

WEEK 10:
Date of preparing: 22/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 27/10/2010.
Period 30

Unit 5 : Thing I do
Lesson 5: C1
A/The aims and the objectives:
- To teach Ss school subject vocabulary with “What do we have today? –We have + name
of subject” to talk about the school timetable and help Ss develop 4skills.
- By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about school timetable with have and
don|t have fluently, to practise school subjects vocab with “what do we have to day? –
We have …” -Ss practise 4 skills fluently.
B/ Preparation: - Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
C/ Procedure:
******************************************************************************* 60
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’) – 2 Ss to go to the board and writing about themselves.B2.
Keys: - I get up at half past five.I go to school at sixfifteen.I have classes at 7 o’lock.I
have lunch at aquarter to twelve. …
- Corrects , remarks and give marks.
III.New lesson(34’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
I.Presentation:(15ms)
+Pre teach: (vocabulary) - Listening to the words.
-(a) timetable(realia): thời khóa biểu - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- English (Translation): Tiếng Anh individual. Correcting the mistakes.
-Math(Realia): Môn Toán - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Literature(realia): Môn ngữ văn - Copying the words.
- History(Realia): Môn lịch sử
- Geography (Realia): Môn địa lí
- Monday (Realia)Thứ hai Listen and work in individially
*Check: Introduces the words by explaining the -Marking the vocabularies in order.
meaning, using the situation. - Giving their ordering.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps 3. English 4.Math 1.Literature
Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). 5.History 2.Geography 6.Monday
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes. - Reading the text & practicing the model in
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. groups & in pairs.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words - Checking the ordering.
+Checking: ordering vocab
Reads: first we have literature. Then we have
Goegraphy . At 8 .40 we have English and then we
have math. At 10.15 we have history . this is our
timetable on Monday.

+Presentation text: C1 P.58:Ask and answer about
the school timetable:
Set the scene: They are Ba and Hoa.They are talking
about their timtable.
Listen to the conversation(twice) then read whisper
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Checks S’s reading & the ordering.
- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to practice * Model sentence
in groups & in pairs. -What do we have today ? (?)
- Corrects & comments. - We have English (+).
2.Practice:(20ms) - I don’t have my timetable (-).
+Word cue drill:
English/ 7.00 Math/ 8.00 - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
Literature/ 8.40 History/ 9.35 - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
Geography/ 10.15 * Example exchange:
3.Further practice:(7ms) S1: What do we have today ?
+Mapped dialogue: S2: We have English.
What........today? History S1: What time does it start ?
******************************************************************************* 61
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
What time....start? 7.50 S2: [ 7.00 ].
Do we...literature... 8.40 No, .......English - Listening to the dialogue.
What time.......finish..... 9.25 - Practicing the dialogue in chorus.
What .... at 9.35? Geography - Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
Do we....math? yes, .....1015 -Correcting pronunciation & the mistakes
+ Devide the class in to 4 groups. Each group has to Example exchange:
dictation the following sentences. S1: What do we have today ?
S2: We have history.
G1: On Monday, we have history.It starts at one p.m S1: What time does it start ?
and finishes at two- forty. S2: At 7.15
G2: We have EL.It starts at one fifty – five and finishes S1: Do we have literature at 8.40 ?
at two forty. S2:No, we don’t. We have English.
G3: We have Math.It starts at two forty and finishes at S1: What time does it finish ?
three thirty – five. S2: At 9.25
G4: We have physics.It starts at three forty five and
finishes at four thirty.
T checks and decides the winner
III.Consolidation:(1m)
Asks the way to use Have/ Do not have
- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the school timetable:
-What do we have today ? (? )- We have English (+).
- I don’t have my timetable (-).
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
IV.Homework:(1m)
- Study the model sentence.
- Exercise: write about your school timetable.Prepare the calendar on page 59 for next lesson.

WEEK 11:
Date of preparing: 26/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 01/11/2010.
Period 31

Unit 5 : Thing I do
Lesson 6: C2-3.

A/The aims and the objectives:
-To teach Ss the day of the week & Wh-qs : “When do/does +S + have + school subject ?
S + have/has +it + on + days of the week..”.To talk about the weekly timetable.
To help Ss develop 4skills.(especially speaking skill)
-By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about the weekly timetable with has/
does not have, days of the week vocabulary.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.
B/ Preparation: - Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
******************************************************************************* 62
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II.Warm up: Play agame : Hang man(6’) – Literature; History ; Math.
L I T E R A T U R E
III.New lesson(34’):

Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Presentation:(12ms)
+Pre teach: (Vocabulary)
-Monday: Thứ 2
-Tuesday:(realia): Thứ 3
-Wednesday: :(realia): Thứ 4 Work individually
-Thursday: :(realia): Thứ 5 Listen and repeat in chorus and individially
-Friday: :(realia): Thứ 6 Copy down
-Saturday: :(realia): Thứ 7
-Sunday: :(realia): CN
+ Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. Correcting the mistakes.
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
mistakes. - Copying the words.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
*Checking: Listen and read .sing a song follow
the video clip.
+Predict dialogue:(answer key C3.P.59)
-Introduces the dialogue & asks Ss to work in work in individially to match the words in
pairs to predict the missing words of the English with the words in VietNamese
dialogue & fill in.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to check -Predicting the missing words of the
their prediction. dialogue & filling in.
-Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Giving & Checking their prediction.
-Corrects S’s pronunciation. - Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Correcting pronunciation.
Nga: When do we have...............?
Ba: We have it on...........and...............
Nga: When do have........................?  Dialogue: ( With answer keys )
Ba: We have it on...........and............... Nga: When do we have ( history ) ?
Nga: Does Lan have math on.....? Ba: We have it on (Tuesday) & (Thursday).
Ba: ............................ Nga: When do we have ( math ) ?
2.Practice:(15ms) Ba: We have it on (Mon),( Wed) & (Fri).
+Board drill: Nga: Does Lan have math on (Friday)?.
- Introduces the timetable & the example Ba: ( No, she doesn’t ).
exchange & Helps Ss to practice. Predict the missing words in groups
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
******************************************************************************* 63
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
groups & in pairs . -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. * Example exchange:
3.Production:(7ms) S1: When do we have Math ?
+Asks ss to fill in their real timetable( only five S2: On Monday, Wednesday & Saturday
subjects they have learn in English) in C2 P.59
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in individual to write about their weekly - Working in individual to write about their
timetable. weekly timetable.
- Asks Ss to give their timetable. - Giving the timetable.
- Corrects & comments. * Example sentence: We have math on
+Asks ss to write : ….,… and …… We have English on ….etc.
We have math on ...........and..............., ..
IV.Consolidation:(1m): -Retell the main points of this lesson.
Asks the way to use Has/ Does not have
- Ask Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the weekly timetable:
S1: When do we have Math ?
S2: On Monday, Wednesday & Saturday
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework:(1m)
- Study the model sentence.
- Exercise: write about your weekly timetable.
- Prepare for next lesson.
WEEK 11:
Date of preparing: 28/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 02/11/2010.
Period 32
Grammar practice
A/The aims and the objectives:
-To teach Ss the day of the week & Wh-qs : “When do/does +S + have + school subject ?
S + have/has +it + on + days of the week..”.To talk about the weekly timetable.
To help Ss develop 4skills.(especially speaking skill)
- By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice in simple present tense, tell the time,
adjective with be, question words, school subjects, days of week.
*Revise present simple tense:
1)To be: + S + am/is/are… / - S + am/is/are + not …
? Am/Is/Are + S …? – Yes,S+am/is/are: - No,S+am/is/are + not.
? Wh-question words + am/is/are +S…?
2) Ordinary verb: + S + V / Vs / V(es)… [ 0 / x / ss / ch /sh + es]
- S + do not / does not + V (infinitive) …
? Do /Does + S + V(infinitive)….?- Yes,S+do/does ; - No,S+ do / does + not.
? Wh –question word + do /does,+ S + V(infinitive) …?
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.

******************************************************************************* 64
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up:
III.New lesson(34’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Telling the time(10M)+Realia drill:
Grammar practice:2 P.60 - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
+ What time is it? –It’s …
- Introduces the example exchange & the picture - Making sentences for the next cues.
then helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups
& in pairs . Example exchange:
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S1:What time is it?
+Dictatation: S2: It is seven
T reads: 1.45, 5.30, 8.15, 8.50, 12.00, 6.20, 3.30,
11.15, 10.25, 3.5, 2.40, 6.30, 9.00, 4.35.
2.Question words(10m).
+Grammar practice: 4 P.61 +-Practice in groups.
+ Ask Ss give question words:What ,where, when, -How do you spell your name ?
how, who, which, why. -What do you have today ?
-Ask Ss discuss in pairs and fill in the gaps. -What time do you get up ?
-Get feedback. -Which grade are you in ?
a) where b) How c) what -When do you have math ?
d) How e) which f) which -What time do you go to school ?
+Noughts and crosses: -What do you do after school ?
Le loi street / 2 floors / N-G- A -What do you do in the afternoon ?
Literature / 5.30 / Grade 6
Tuesday / 7.00 / I play football
Asks ss to make questions
3.Adj with be (10m)
Grammar practice: 3 P.61 Work in pairs
+Word cue drill: Run through the cues.
House school city
country street Family living room
Example exchange
S1: Is your {house} big? - Working in to work in individual to interview
S2: Yes,it is /No it is not. each other by making the Yes / No question &
4.Present simple tense(10) fill the information in the table.
+Find Someone who… ?
Name Find Someone who…?
- Going around & ask the other to get the
.....gets dressed
information to fill the information in the table
.....go to bed at 10.00
.....eats a big breakfast
.....have lunch
.....plays volleyball after school
.....does the housework
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
******************************************************************************* 65
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
individual to interview each other by making the Yes
/ No question & fill the information in the table. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
-Examples with Ss & fill the information in the table.
- Asks Ss to go around & ask the other. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups
& in pairs . - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
+word cue drill: -Correcting the pronunciation.
Mon / Tue/ Wed / Thur / Fri / Sat
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to Example exchange:
practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to
repeat in chorus & in individual. S1: What do you have on Monday ?
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S2: We have [math] & {English].
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups S1: Do you have [history] on Monday ?
& in pairs . S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments

III.Consolidation(2m):-Retell the main points of this lesson.
Do grammar practice 1 P.60 and 5-7 P.61
- Asks Ss to summarize the use of all the grammars.
IV.Homework(2m) : - SS finish their exercises in P.60,61
- Study the grammar & the model sentences.
- Prepare the picture on page 62.


WEEK 11:
Date of preparing: 29/10/2010 - Date of teaching: 03/11/2010.
Period 33

Unit 6 : places
Lesson 1: A1-3.Our house
A/The aims and the objectives:
- Help Ss read the text about where Thuy lives. Ss develop 4skills.
- By the end of this lesson ss will be able to read and understand the text describing where
Thuy lives,revise present simple tense with Wh-qs, Who’s that?, who are those?, town
and country vocabulary.
- -Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and speaking skills)
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’) – 2 Ss to go to the board and put the verbs in correct form:
1. Every evening,my father(watch )……. TV.

******************************************************************************* 66
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
2. Nam (be) ………… my friend.He ( play) ………… soccer everyday.
*Keys: 1. Watches 2. Is/ plays
- Corrects , remarks and give marks.
III.New lesson(34’):
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
1.Pre reading(8ms)
+Pre teach(Vocabulary) - Listening to the words.
A lake: (Picture):Hồ
A river:(Picture): Sông - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual.
A tree: (Picture): cây Correcting the mistakes.
A flower: (Picture) : Bông hoa
A rice paddy: (Picture): Cách đồng - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
A park: (Picture): Công viên - Copying the words.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the -Ss enjoy the game.
mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: What and where: - Predicting “What’s near Thuy’s house” & write
+Open prediction: 3 things in their books.
What are near Thuy|s house? - Giving the prediction.
2.While reading(18ms)
+Check their predictions: Asks ss to read the text
in A1 P.62: Our house - Reading the text .
+Ordering vocabulary: P.62: - Checking the prediction
T reads thesecond bubble aloud: “ It is beautiful
here .There is a river and……near our house.”
Answer key: a lake-2 Trees-4
A river-1 Flowers-5
A rice paddy-6 A park-3
+Matching: Asks ss to read the text again and
guess the meaning of these words from context
and match(with anwer key) -Matching the meaning of the words from the
Near khách sạn context
A yard Xinh đẹp -Comparing & giving the information.
Beautiful gần nhà
A hotel Sân -Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the
+Comprehension questions: A1P.62 Questions: keys.
a-f
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
pairs to answer. Then give the keys.
 Answer:
-Corrects & comments.
1./ She is twelve years old.
 Questions: 2./ She is a student.
1./ How old is Thuy ? 3./ Her brother’s name is Minh.
2./ What does she do ? 4./ He is twenty.
3./ What’s her brother’s name ? 5./ Thuy lives in a house.
4./ How old is he ?

******************************************************************************* 67
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
5./ Where does Thuy live ? 6./ A lake, a rice paddy, a park, a river, a hotel
6./ What’s there, near Thuy’s house ?
3.Post reading (7ms)
+Picture drill:P.62 or P.63 - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Introduces the pictures 0n page 62/63 & the - Making sentences for the next cues.
example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to - Correcting the pronunciation.
repeat in chorus & in individual. *Example exchange:
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. A: What’s that ?
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in B: It’s a [river].
groups & in pairs . A: What are those ?
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments B: They are [trees].
+Write it up: A3 P.63




IV.Consolidation(3ms)
Asks again vocabulary
- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer about the things:
A: What’s that ? A: What are those ?
B: It’s a [river]. B: They are [trees].

- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework(2ms)
- Study the vocabulary & the exchange.
- Exercise: write what’s near your house.

WEEK 12:
Date of preparing: 08/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 13/11/2010.
Period 34

Unit 6 : places
Lesson 2: A4-5.Our house
A/The aims and the objectives:
- To help Ss know the ways to describe places where they live.
- To help Ss develop 4 skills.
- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to describe places where they live using town
and country vocabulary: There is / there are … near …
- Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and speaking skills)
B/ Preparation: Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:

******************************************************************************* 68
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’) Jumble words:
1.Yard / 2.hotel / 3.river / 4.lake / 5.park / 6.trees / 7.rice paddy.
- Corrects , remarks and give marks.
* Revision words:
III.New lesson(34’)
TEACHER'S activitives STUDENTS' activities
 Presentation:
1.Vocabulary:
(a) village : làng -Listening to the tapecript
(a) town : phố , thị trấn, thị xã. Twice.
* Listen: A4(64): - Write the words they hear
Ask Ss guess the words and then listen and check - Work individually
their predict.
Ask Ss listen twice.
-Get feedback
*keys:
a) hotel
b)city - Copying down the words listening to the
c)River sentences & take note the right order.
*A5(64) - Checking & correcting
- Set the scene : near our house, there are many
things, now look at the pictures and describe - Do exercises 5(P.64)
Eg: There is a hotel near our house. - Work in groups of 3 or 4
There are trees near our house.
* Revision:
There is + a/an + n - số ít
There are + n - số nhiều.(V s/es).
* Practice:
- run through 6 pictures: a hotel / trees / ….

Ask Ss write sentences as model sentence.
There is … /;There are …

- T-WC, individual.

Write, T corrects mistakes.

*Answer keys:
 There are trees near my house There is a hotel near my house
 There is a lake near our house There is a park near our house
 There is a school near our house There is a river near my house
 There is rice paddy near my house …
 There are trees and flowers in the park near  Write about some places near their
my house. house
- Work individually

******************************************************************************* 69
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
 Note:
/s/:khi từ có tận cùng là âm /t/, /p/, /f/, /k/, /th -Working in pairs to answer. Then
/iz/: tận cùng là các chữ cái:ce x, z, sh, ch, s, ge. giving the keys.
/z/: Các âm còn lại

IV. CONSOLIDATION(1’) : -T sums up:
How to describe place using :
There is … / There are…
-Retell /s/ ;/ Iz/ ; /z/
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks(1’):
- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.
- Do exercises
- Prepare for next lesson.

- /s/:Khi từ có tận cùng là các phụ âm vô thanh /t/, /p/, /f/, /k/, /ð/
E.g.
Units / 'ju:nits/ Stops / st ps/ Topics / 't piks / Laughes / l :fs/ Breathes / bri:ðs/

- /iz/:Khi từ có tận cùng là các âm /s/, /z/, /∫/, /t∫/, / /, /d / (thường có tận cùng là các chữ cái ce, x, z, sh, ch, s, ge)
E.g.
Classes / kl :siz/ washes /w ∫iz/ Watches / w t∫iz/ Changes /t∫eind iz/
- /z/:Khi từ có tận cùng là nguyên âm và các phụ âm hữu thanh còn lại
E.g.
Plays / pleiz/
Bags / bægz/
speeds / spi:dz/



WEEK 13:
Date of preparing: 10/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 15/11/2010.
Period 35

Unit 6 : places
Lesson 3: B1-3(p 65-67)

A/The aims and the objectives:
- To help Ss read and understand the text about Minh and where he lives,town vocabulary
and prepositions of places.
- To help Ss develop 4 skills.
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the details & town vocabulary &
prepositions of place(next to, in,near..)
- Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and listening skills)
B/ Preparation: Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.

******************************************************************************* 70
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’)
EX6(64) : R and R dialogue.
-Elicit the dialogue, rub out nouns,call Ss write them again
- Corrects , remarks and give marks.
III.New lesson(34’)
TEACHER'S activities STUDENTS' activities
**PRE-READING :
1.Vocabulary( 8’) - Listening to the words.
(a)book) store (n); Cửa hàng sách(Visual ) - Repeating the words in chorus & in
(a) restaurant (n); Nhà hàng (picture) individual. Correcting the mistakes.
(a) temple (n); Miếu thờ (picture) - Giving the meaning & the
(a) hospital (n); Bệnh viện (picture) pronunciation.
(a) factory (n): Nhà máy (picture) - Copy down the words.
(a)museum (n):Bảo tàng(picture)
(a)stadium (n): Sân vận động (example)
(a) neighborhood: vùng lân cận, hàng xóm.(trans)
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, -enjoying the game.
using the situation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the - Working in pairs to predict.
mistakes. - Comparing their prediction.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Giving their prediction.
+Check :Slap the board
* True / False prediction:6’ * Statements: Near Minh’s house
-Introduces the statements & ask Ss to work in 1./ There is a restaurant.
pairs to predict what is near Minh’s house. 2./ There is a lake..
-Asks Ss to compare their prediction. 3./ There is a hospital.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Comments.
*Answer keys: 1./ T; 2./ F; 3./ T; - Reading the text .
*WHILE-READING: 10 M. - Checking the prediction.
2.Presentation text: B1-P65. -Working in pairs to answer. Then
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. giving the keys.
- Asks Ss check their prediction.
- Corrects & comments. 5./ Minh’s mother works in a factory.
* Comprehension questions: B1-P66. 6./ Minh’s father works in a hospital
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
pairs to choose the True / False statements & Answer key:
complete the sentences.Then give the keys. 1../ F; 2./ T; 3./ F; 4./ T; 5./ F;
-Corrects & comments. 6./ F;
 True / False statements: B1-P66
1./ Minh lives in the country. Answer key:
2./ There are four people in his family. 1./ Minh & his family live in the CITY.
3./ Their house is next to a bookstore. 2./ On the street, there is a

******************************************************************************* 71
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
4./ There is museum near their house. RESTAURANT, a BOOKSTORE & a
 Complete the sentences: TEMPLE.
1./ Minh & his family live in the ........ 3./ His mother works in a HOSPITAL.
2./ On the street, there is a.....,a......& a......... 4./ His father work in a FACTORY.
3./ His mother works in a.............
4./ His father work in a ...............
**.POST -READING (10 M)
3. Dictation: B3 - P67. Listening & rewriting the words they
- Reads the words in the box & asks Ss to listen hear.
& rewrite the words they hear. - Comparing their copying.
- Asks Ss to compare their copying. - Checking the words.
- Reads the words again to help Ss to check. -- Asks Ss to give the words they
- Asks Ss to give the words they copied. copied.
-Corrects & comments
a Museum Stadium Temple Hospital
b Restaurant Store Bookstore Factory
c Park River Lake Yard
d Hotel House Street Tree

IV. Consolidation(2’)- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Retell the text about Minh and where he lives, how to describe places and surroundings .
Revision present simple
V. Homework (2’)
Learn by heart vocabulary and read a text again, finish all exercises.
- Exercise: write about your house and you family members.
- Prepare the place vocabulary.

WEEK 13:
Date of preparing: 12/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 16/11/2010.
Period 36
Unit 6 : places
Lesson 4: C1,2.Around the house

A/The aims and the objectives:
- To help Ss listen,read and understand the paragraph describing around the house. They
know some prepositions of position.to practice in more preposition of places: IN FRONT
OF; TO THE LEFT/ RIGHT OF; BEHIND. …
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to listen,read,and understand the paragraph and
know some prepositions of position.And use preposition to describe the position of the
house.
- Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and listening skills)
B/ Preparation: Computer and projector
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
******************************************************************************* 72
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’)
T helps Ss revise the following words using the game: “Boardback”
+ a hotel + a lake + a hospital + a yard
+ a rice paddy + a factory + a flower
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
III.New lesson(34’)
TEACHER'S activities STUDENTS' activities
*Pre-teach: - Listening to the words.
1.Vocabulary: - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- in front of:((prep.) Ở phía trước(example) individual.
- behind(prep.) phía sau (relia) - Giving the meaning & the
- to the left of…/ to the right of…: (prep.): phía bên trái của / pronunciation.
phía bên phải của ….(example) - Copying the words.
- Look at (v) nhìn vào(trans) - Practicing in groups & in pairs by
- (a) Well: cái giếng( visual ) repeating the position of the tree.
- (a) mountain : núi( visual ) - Corrects the pronunciation &
- Tall (adj) Cao ( antonym) mistakes.
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the
situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss
to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
+Check:R and R
**PRESENTATION * next to the house/ near the house
2. Presentation text: C1 - P68. in front of the house
set the scene: There is a house and something around behind the house
(picture Page 68) to the left of the house
-Ask Ss to listen and read the text and underline the to the right of the house
prepositions
*PRACTICE (15 M) - Reading the text in groups & in pairs.
3. Comprehension questions: C1 - P68. - Corrects the pronunciation &
* Example exchange; mistakes.
S1: Where is the tree ? -Working in pairs to answer. Then
S2: It’s [next to] the house. giving the keys.
- Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in groups & in pairs.  Answer:
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & mistakes. 1./ It’s in front of the house ?
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to 2./ They are behind the house ?
answer. Then give the keys. 3./ They are behind the tall trees ?
-Corrects & comments. 4./ It’s in to the left of the house?
 Questions: 5./ They are to the right of the house ?
1./ Where is the yard ? 6./ It’s behind the yard ?
2./ Where are the tall trees ?
3./ Where are the mountains ? - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
4./ Where is the well ? - Making sentences for the next cues.
5./ Where are the flowers ? - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
6./ Where is the house ? - Correcting the pronunciation.
* Picture drill. C1 - P68. *Example exchange:
******************************************************************************* 73
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. S1: Where are the [mountains] ?
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in S2: They are [behind] the tall trees.
chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.  Keys:
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in a) Picture A
pairs . b) Pic B
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. c) Pic B
*Further practice(7’)
+ C2(69): Run through the 3 qs and 6 pictures  Eg:This is Ba’s house. To the
Ask Ss to listen and match the Qs with the right pictures left of the house , there is …
(the right answer)
-Get feedback -Write individually
* Write it up:
Ask Ss to write sectences describing the house they’ve
chosen.
Model: Ba lives in abeautiful house. There is/are ….
- Let Ss write and check some Ss
IV. CONSOLIDATION (2M ):
-Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to ask the position of thing near their house & the preposition
of places:
S1: Where are the [mountains] ?
S2: They are [behind] the tall trees.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks: (2M)
- Study model sentence & the preposition.
- Write about thing near your house.
- Prepare the picture on page 70.

WEEK 14:
Date of preparing: 18/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 22/11/2010.
Period 37
Unit 6 : places
Lesson 4: c3-4-6

A/The aims and the objectives:
- To help Ss read the text describing postion of stores in a street.
Ss use “ where is/ are …?” with town vocabulary and prepositions of position to answer.
To help Ss develop 4 skills.
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read and understand the paragraph and know
some prepositions of position.And use preposition to describe a street.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and listening skills)
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
******************************************************************************* 74
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II.Checking up: (6’)
Questions: 1. S1 rewrite vocabulary of last lesson.
2. Other write sentences that describe his/her house.
Model: In front of my house, there is a big yard …
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
III.New lesson(34’)
TEACHER'S activities STUDENTS' activities
*PRESENTATION
1.Vocabulary: - Listening to the words.
- (a) drug store: Cửa hàng thuốc tây (picture)
- (a) toystore: cửa hàng đồ chơi (picture) - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- (a) movie theater: Rạp chiếu phim (picture) individual. Correcting the mistakes.
-(a)police station: đồn công an (picture)
-(a) bakery: Tiệm bánh mì (picture) - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- between(prep.) Ở giữa (rexample) - Copying the words.
- opposite(prep.) đối diện (example)
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Reading the text in groups & in pairs.
meaning, using the situation. - Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Check vocabulary:slap the board
- Making sentences for the next cues.
2. Presentation text: C3 - P70.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
Ss Listen to the disc and look at the text
books(twice)
- Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in
groups & in pairs.
- Check S’s reading & Corrects S’s
pronunciation & mistakes.
*Give forms: S + to be + prep + N(place)
PRACTICE 15 M.
3.Picture drill. C4 a) - P70.
Run through the picture of a street.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice. - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Reads the first model for example - Asks Ss *Example exchange:
to make sentences for the next. S1: Where are the [.........] ?
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in S2: It’s opposite the..........
groups & in pairs . It’s between the ...and the...
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Writing a place in the picture on page 70 on
*Guessing game: C4 b) - P71. a piece of paper.
- Asks Ss to write a place in the picture on
page 70 on a piece of paper. - Making Yes/ No – questions to guess the
- Asks Ss to make Yes/ No – questions to place in the paper & change the role.
guess the place in the paper & change the * Statements:
role. 1./ It’s opposite the bakery.
- Comments the game. 2./ it’s between the bakery & the drugstore.
 Example: 3./ It’s next to the bakery.
It’s opposite the movie theater. What is it ? 4./ It’s opposite the bookstore.

******************************************************************************* 75
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
It’s is the police station. 5./ It’s next to the movie theater.
Yes, that’s right. - Working in pairs to interview each other
* PRODUCTION 10 M about the places near their house & take note
***. Survey: C5 -P71. the information & fill in the table.
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in -Reporting the information.
pairs to interview each other about the places * Example exchange:
near their house & take note the information & S1: What’s [in front of] your house ?
fill in the table. S2: [ A rice paddy].
-Asks Ss to report the information.
- Corrects & comments.
Name In front of be hind opposite to the left of to the right of Near
Hoa A Rice paddy …


IV. CONSOLIDATION (2 M ):
-Asks Ss to give the questions & model sentence used to ask & answer the position of things
near the house & the preposition of places:
S1: Where are the [..........] ?
S2: It’s opposite the................
It’s between the ..........and the................
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks: (2M)
- Study model sentence & the questions.
- Consolidate all the model sentences & the grammars & redo the exercise
in the student’s book to prepare for the forty-five minute test.

WEEK 14:
Date of preparing: 18/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 23/11/2010.
Period 38

Revision
A/The aims and the objectives:
To help Ss revise the knowledge in unit 5 and 6. Help Ss improve their 4 skills.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use structures well:
+ Present simple tense
+ Yes(No) questions
+ Wh-questions
+ There is(There are) + a/an …+ N(s/es)place + pre + N place
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 5 and 6
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (6’)
******************************************************************************* 76
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
 Network: Prep of position … next to


Prep of
position
To the left of the right

-Ask some Ss to write on bb behind near
III.New lesson(34’)

TEACHER'S activities STUDENTS' activities
1. Complete the following sentences as the model
with: How any….? -Do exercises individually.
Window/ our/ classroom/4.
A: How many windows are there in the classroom. - Then go to the board and rewrite.
B: There are four.
a. teacher / your school./ 68 - Correct mistakes.
b. desk / class / 15.
c. ruler / school bag / 1. - One by one go to the board to do
d. people / living-room / 17. exercises.
e. room / your house / 5.
2*Choose the correct answers to fill in the gaps.
a. What (is / are) those? * Make the questions for
b. That’s my dog. (Its/ It’s) name is Reek. following sentences.
c. Where are Mr. and Mrs. Ba?-(They’re/There) in the Ex: This is an eraser.
yard. What is this?
d. There is (a/ an) armchair in our living room.
e. Is this ( your/ you’re) book? a. There are 29 pupils in my class.
f. ( I’m/ Am) sixteen years old. e We are fine , Thanks.
g. (We’re/ Where) do you live? b. That is my teacher
h. Mr. and Mrs. Wilson are in (Their/There) house. h. I live in Ha Long.
i. Are there (fifty/ fifty) in your class. c. These are pencils.
j. My brother and (I/ me) are in our room. i. Yes, those are my books.
k. What (do/ does) your mother do? d. I’m twenty years old.
3*Make the questions for following sentences. g. We are in living room.
Ex: This is an eraser. What is this? f. His name is Tuan.
a. There are 29 pupils in my class.
b. That is my teacher.
c. These are pencils.
d. I’m twenty years old.
e We are fine , Thanks. -Do exercises individually.
f. His name is Tuan.
g. We are in living room. - correct mistakes.
h. I live in Ha Long.
i. Yes, those are my books.
4* Put the verbs in the correct form.

******************************************************************************* 77
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Every morning, Lan.. (a).. (get) up. She ..(b)..(wash)
her face. She..(c)..(have) a big breakfast. Then,
she..(d)..(brush) her teeth. She..(e)..(get) dressed and
..(f).. (go) to school
5*Give the correct form of the verbs in the
brackets - Do exercises.
1. Nga ( not have) History on Saturday - Give answer keys
2. Nam ( have ) Literature on Friday
3. They ( have) Math on Monday Some Ss go to the board and do
4. Our children (have) dinner at half past five. exercises.
5. He (not have) a big breakfast every morning - Work individually.
6. My school (have) 700 students Copy down on the notebooks
7. Mr and Mrs Ha (have) a daughter.
8. His family (have) three people
9. I (not have) two bookshelves in my room
10. My house (not have) three televisions

Iv. Consolidation:
- Retell the main contents of this lesson.

V. Homework:
- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structures grammar.
-Do all exercises
-Prepare for next lesson.

WEEK 14.
Date of preparing: 19/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 24/ 11/ 2010.


§39:
Time: 45’(No 2)
I. The aims and requests
- To help students continue to make aqquainted with the form of a written test., help T evaluate
Ss, level exactly.
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to do the test well.
- Develop Ss’ skills in doing a written test.
II. Pereparation
1. Teacher: Written test (photocopy test)


******************************************************************************* 78
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
2. Students: preparation for the test.
III. Procedures
1. Organization (1’): – Greetings and checking attendance
2. Content of the test
Đề và đáp án do PGD ra
3. Collect the test
4. Homework (30'')
- Prepare Unit 7 part A1
Đề tham khảo
I.C hoose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)
1.This is my..........................
a.hello b.hi c.family d.fine
2.We are in the .............................
a.living room b.window c.table d.door
3.There are four.................in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I.
a.dogs b.people c.window d.chairs
4. My mother is thirty-five....................old.
a.year b.years c.age d.ages
5. She is a...................
a.doctors b.engeneer c.teachers d.student
6. We.........................on Tran Hung Dao street..
a.address b.is c.live d.are
7. ........................are you? I am fine, thanks.
a.Where b.what c.How d.Who
8. Is this .................... friend? -Yes, he’s my friend.
a.his b.her c.my d.your
9. This is.................eraser ?
a. on b. an c. a d.in
10. What is your......................? -My name is Lan.
a.name b.student c.teacher d.friend
II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)
1_______ 2________3_________4_________5_________6____________
A B
1.What is this? a. Yes,it is.
2.Are these your pens? b. It’s a book.
3.Is that your house? c.I live on Tran Phu street.
4.Who is that? d. No, it isn’t. It’s his ruler
5.Where do you live? e. No, there aren’t.
6. Is this your ruler? f. That’s Mai
III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )

a./ 25 = …………………………….…; b./ 75 = …………………………….… ;
c./ 30 = ……………………………..…; d./ 100 = ……..………………………..;

******************************************************************************* 79
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
IV.Fill in the gaps with the suitable words . ( 1,5 M ).

My (1) ………………………is Lan. I (2) ……………………… twelve years old. I am (3)
………………….. student and I am (4) ……………………. grade 6. I am now live
(5) ………….. Huong Phung. There (6) ………………….…. four people in my family.

V.Complete these sentences. (2M).
a./ Come…………………………….…; b./ ………………………morning ;
c./ Sit ……………………………..…; d./ ………………………….your book ;
e./ Open …………………………book ; f./ ………………………afternoon ;
g./ ……………………………….up ; h./ ……………………………….. night ;
VI.Write the questions and the answer with “HOW MANY” (1M).
a./ board / one: ……………..………………………………..………………………….…;
b./ students / twenty: ……..…………………………………..………………………..….;
c./ ruler / three: …………..……...………………………..……..………..…………….…;
d./ school – bag: ….……………..…………………………..………………………….…;

VII.Put the words in the corects order. (0,5m)
1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.
..........................................................................................
2 . / my / this /teacher / is / .

.........................................................................................
THE END

WEEK 15.
Date of preparing: 25/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 29/11/2010.
Period 40.

Unit 7 : Your house
Lesson 1: A1-2(p.72)
A/The aims and the objectives:
- Helps Ss to listen and read a dialogue & read a letter about a house.
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the dialogue & the
letter.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and listening skills)
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (5’)
Questions: Ask 2 Ss rewrite vocabulary of unit 6
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
III.New lesson(34’)
******************************************************************************* 80
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
TEACHER'S activities STUDENTS' activities
*PRE-LISTENING :(5’).A2(72) - Working in pairs to predict which
1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid) the statements is true or false.
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to - Comparing & Giving the keys.
predict which the statements is true or false. Yes No
- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys & …big ? √
Comments …small ? √
- Get feedback …a yard ? √
…a well ? √
*WHILE-LISTENING:8 M: …flowers √
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72. … trees? √
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue
between Minh and Hoa & get the details. - Listening to the dialogue & getting
- Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check the the details.
prediction & Corrects. - Listening to the dialogue &
*PRE-READING:8 M checking the prediction.
3. Vocabulary: - Repeating the words in chorus &
(a) garden (n): Khu vườn( explaination) in individual.
(a) vegetable (n):rau(examples) - Correcting the mistakes.
(a) photo (n):bức ảnh(realia) - Giving the meaning & the
(a)letter :lá thư (realia) pronunciation.
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, - Copying the words.
using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps - Working in pairs to predict which
SS to repeat ( 2 times ). the statements is true or false.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the - Comparing & Giving the keys.
mistakes. * Statements:
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & 1. The house is in the country.
the pronunciation. 2. There is a river near the house.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 3. There’re trees to the left of the
*True / False statement prediction: house.
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to 4. There’re two gardens.
predict which the statements is true or false. - Reading the letter & get the
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys & Comments.. details.
* Answer keys: - Giving the main idea of the letter.
1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T; - Working in pairs to match the
•WHILE-READING:8M questions to the answers.
*Presentation text: A2-P73. - Giving the answer keys.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter & get the - Correcting the answer keys
details. &Commenting
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter. A. Yes, it is.
- Corrects comments. B. No, it isn’t.
*Comprehension questions: A2/P73. C. No, she isn’t.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs D. Yes, there is..
to match the questions to the answers. E. No, there isn’t.
******************************************************************************* 81
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.  Answer:
a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the house ? a –D; b – A; c – E; d – E; e –
b. Is the house beautiful ? C.
c. Is there a flowers garden behind the house? - Writing in individual & giving the
d. Is there a lake to the right of the house? information.
e. Is Nga in the city ? * My house:
•POST-LISTENING & READING :5 M There’s a flowers garden in front of
*Transformation writing: the house. There’s a vegetable
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in garden behind the house. To the
individual to change the underlined information to left of the house, there’s a lake. To
describe their own house & then draw a picture of it as the right of the house, there are tall
a photo . trees. Here is a photo.
- Asks Ss to give their information & comments.

IV.CONSOLIDATION(2 M ): Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
- How to describe a house and something around the house.
V. Homeworks (2 M ):
- Learn by heart vocabulary and finish their writing.
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare the picture on page 74.




WEEK 15.
Date of preparing: 27/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 30/11/2010.
Period 41.

Unit 7 : Your house
Lesson 2: A 3 - 5(p.74)
A/The aims and the objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in facilities vocabulary with:
“IS THERE a/an… ; ARE THERE any …?”
& short answer to describe the town.
By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe the town where they live.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and listening skills)
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (5’)

******************************************************************************* 82
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
–Rewrite the vocabulary of last lesson.
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
III.New lesson(34’)

TEACHER'S activities STUDENTS' activities
* PRESENTATION :8 M. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
1. Vocabulary: Slap the Board individual.
(a) bank (n);ngân hàng ( visual ) - Correcting the mistakes.
(a) clinic (n);trạm y tế, phòng khám tư (explain ) - Giving the meaning & the
-shops(n) cửa hàng, cửa hiệu (visual ) pronunciation.
(a) post office (n) bưu điện (visual ) - Copying the words.
(a) supermarket (n)siêu thị(visual )
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Practicing the dialogue in pairs
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the -Correcting the pronunciation.
mistakes. - Practicing the model sentence in
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the groups & in pairs.
meaning & the pronunciation. •Model sentence:
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
2. Presentation dialogue:(6’) A1-P72. *Is there a yard ?
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. Well?
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to - Yes, there is.
practice. - No, there isn’t.
- Checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs. *Are there any flowers ?
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. trees?
*PRACTICE: 10 M.
3. Picture drill: A3b) – P74. – Yes, there are.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to – No, there aren’t.
practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
repeat in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in - Correcting the pronunciation
groups & in pairs . * Example exchange:
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S1: Is there [a hotel] near your house ?
S2: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t.
*FURTHER PRACTICE: 8M(Survey) S1: Are there any [shops] near your
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in house ?
groups to ask & answer about the other’s house S2: Yes, there are. / No, there aren’t.
& take note the information into the table.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the information.
- Comments S’s information. - Working in groups to ask & answer
about the other’s house & taking note the

******************************************************************************* 83
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
information into the table.
- Comparing & reporting the information.


IV.CONSOLIDATION(2 M ): Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Is there +a / an…? –Yes/ No .
Are there any …? Yes /No .

V. Homeworks (2 M ):
- Learn by heart vocabulary and all structures grammar.
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare for next lesson.




WEEK 15.
Date of preparing: 27/11/2010 - Date of teaching: 1/12/2010.

Unit 7 : Your house
Period 42.



Lesson 3: B1-3(p.76,77)
A/The aims and the objectives:
- Helps Ss to read a text about Ba’s & Chi’s house to understand the differences between town &
country. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the text & compare the life in
city & the country.
-Helps Ss to practice in integrated skill to describe the place where they live. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to describe the place where they live.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially speaking and listening skills)
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (5’)
Ask Ss to read their descriptions about their houses A3(74)

******************************************************************************* 84
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
III.New lesson(34’)

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
*PRE-READING: 12 M. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
1. Vocabulary: individual.
-a market (n):chợ (trans)
-an apartment (n):căn hộ (trans) - Correcting the mistakes.
-paddy field = rice paddy (n) (synonyms) - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-noisy ≠ quiet (adj) ồn ào> < yên tĩnh (antonym) - Copying the words.
-a zoo (n):vườn bách thú (visual )
*Check: R & R
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the - Looking at the pictures to remember
situation. things in these picture.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to
repeat ( 2 times ). - Talking about the things they saw. Using
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. the model sentences:
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the
pronunciation. * Model sentences:
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 1) + “There’s a zoo, a post office…..”
2. Kim’s game: B1 – P76/77. + “There’s a lake, a river…..”
- Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to look at the pictures to 2)S1: Do you live in town ?
remember things in these picture. S2: No. I live in the country.
- Hides the pictures & asks Ss to talk about the things they S1: Does he live in town ?
saw. Using this model sentences: S2: No. He lives in the country.
- Comments the game.
*WHILE-READING: 12 M - Reading the letter & get the details.
3. Presentation text: B1 – P76/77. - Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts about Ba’s & Chi’s
house & get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the
- Corrects comments. questions to the answers.
*• Comprehension questions: B1 – P76.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask - Giving the answer keys.
& answer the questions to the answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments. - Correcting the answer keys
* Questions: &Commenting
a. Does Ba live in town ?
b. Does he live in a house ? * Answer keys:
c. Is it noisy ? A. Yes, he does.
d. Does Chi live in town ? B. No, he doesn’t
e. Are there any stores ? C. Yes, it is.
f. Is it quiet ? D. No, she doesn’t
• POST- READING:10M E. No, there aren’t.
Word cue drill: F. Yes, it is.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in
chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in - Making sentences for the next cues.

******************************************************************************* 85
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
pairs . - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Correcting the pronunciation
+Town / country
+House / apartment * Example exchange:
+ Lake/ river S1: Do you live in town ?
+Hospital/ factory S2: No. I live [ in the country ].
*Compare: S1: Do you live near [ a lake ] ?
In town In the country S2: No. I live [ near a river ].
… it’s noisy … it’s quiet
…we live in an apartment … etc. +Supermarket/market
…there aren’t any paddy fields + Shop / paddy field
…there is a zoo +Zoo/ museum
… there are shops
… etc.


IV.CONSOLIDATION (2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
The present simple tense: Do/Does + S + V(inf)…?-Yes/ No
V.Homeworks: (2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts.
- Exercise: write a short paragraph to compare the differences
between town & country base on the information you have compared .
- Prepare the pictures on page 76 & 77.


WEEK 16:
Date of preparing: 01/12/2010 - Date of teaching: 06/12/2010.
Period 43

Tr¶ vµ ch÷a bµi KiÓm tra
A/The aims and the objectives:
- Help Ss know their test rerult and find out their mistakes and draw out their experiences
for the next tests.
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to do a test correctly and correct
their mistakes.Ss consolidate their knowledge from unit 4 to unit 6.
- Develop Ss’ skills of doing a test.
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan,Keys of the test, posters.
Ss’: Revise units 1-2-3.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up(5’)
• T calls some Ss to describes some picturers using :
******************************************************************************* 86
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Is there a tree in front of house? – yes / No .
Are there any flowers to the left of her house? Yes,there are / No, there aren’t.
• T corrects and give them marks
III. Contents:
- T gives the aims of the lesson.
- Remarks in general( good and bad points)
A/ Good points: - Đại đa số các em biết cách trình bày bài kiểm tra,biết cách trình bày dạng
bài tập,Trình bày sạch sẽ khoa học(nêu tên 1 số em tiêu biểu).
Nhiều học sinh làm bài tốt,viết chữ đẹp, đạt điểm cao.
B/ Bad points:
Bên cạnh các em tốt cũng có nhiều em viết chữ còn quá ẩu, tẩy xóa nhiều trong bài kiểm
tra,hiện tương dùng bút xóa tràn lan. Một số bạn chưa chăm học, những cấu trúc câu, ngữ
pháp không thuộc nên không áp dụng để làm bài tập, bài tập chia động từ Tobe chưa thạo,
cách chuyển ngôi chưa tốt, dẫn đến điểm chưa cao( nêu tên những trường hợp điểm kém,
cụ thể tên)
-Cần rút kinh nghiệm cho những bài tập sau này.
* Giáo viên trả bài và chữa bài cho học sinh (T gives the test back to students and correct the
test).
C/ Answer keys:
- Đáp án của bài kiểm tra của phòng giáo dục.


Trả và chữa bài kiểm tra
§40: Đề tham khảo
Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities
I.Choose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M) Answer:
1.How many peolpe are ............................? 1.c
a.this b.that c.there d.they
2.We are ..................... the living room. 2.a
a.in b.on c.at d.into
3.There ......... four peolpe in my family: my father, my 3.b
mother, my brother and I.3:........
a.is b.are c.am d.does 4.d
4. ......................is that? - That is Lan.
a.Where b.what c.How d.Who 5.d
5. She is a...................
a.doctors b.engeneer c.teachers d.student 6.c
6. We.........................on Tran Hung Dao street..
a.lives b.is c.live d.are 7.c
7. ........................are you? I am fine, thanks.
a.Where b.what c.How d.Who 8.a
8. Is this .................... friend? -Yes, he’s my friend.
a.his b.her c.my d.your 9.b
9. This is.................eraser
a. on b. an c. a d.in 10.a
10. What .........your name? -My name is Lan. Key:
a.is b.are c.am d.does 1:......b........ 2:...........e......
II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M) 3:..........a........ 4:........f.......... 5:............c......
A B 6:..........d......
1.What is this? a. Yes,it is.
2.Are these your pens? b. It’s a book. a.fifteen

******************************************************************************* 87
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
3.Is that your house? c.I live on Tran Phu street. b.twenty-eight
4.Who is that? d. No, it isn’t.It’s his ruler c.thirty
5.Where do you live? e. No, they aren’t. d.fifty-nine
6. Is this your ruler? f. That’s Mai
III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M ) Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children.
a. 15 = ........ c. 28 = ......... b. 30 = ........ d. 59 = ...... Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan.
III. Write the dialogues in the correct order. (1m) Miss Hoan: How are you today?
Children: We’re fine, thank you. How are you? Children: We’re fine, thank you. How are you?
Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children. Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Bye. Children: Bye.
Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan. 1There are five people in my family.
Miss Hoan: How are you today? 2.He is forty-two.
IV. Read. Then write the answer.(2ms) 3. He is a doctor.
I am Nam. This is my family. We are in our yard. 4.She is a nurse.
There are five people in my family: my father, my mother,
my brother, my sister and me. My father is forty-two. He is a VI/ Put …
doctor. My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My brother **1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.
is ten. My sister is twelve. They are students. =>1.How many people are there?
1. How many people are there in his family? 2 . / my / this /teacher / is / .
2.How old is his father? =>2.This is my teacher.
3.what does he do? 3. / an / he / engineer / is /.
4what does his mother do? =>He is an engeneer
VI.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms) .4. /name/ her/ is / Nga/.
1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /. =>Her name is Nga.
2 . / my / this /teacher / is / .

WEEK 16.
Date of preparing: 03/12/2010 - Date of teaching: 7/12/2010.

Unit 7 : Your house
Period 44.



Lesson 4: C1-3. On the move
A/The aims and the objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in Simple present with ‘How’ questions & “by car / by bike / by train
…” to talk about transportation.
By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their moves.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially speaking and listening skills)
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (5’)
Revision ( 5 M ) : Guessing game
- Asks Ss to choose a place in town Model sentence: B4 – P77.
(factory; museum; post office;…) & S1: Do you live near a part ?
******************************************************************************* 88
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
complete the sentences strip & play the S2: No, I don’t.
game in groups. S1: Do you live near a bank ?
- Corrects , remarks and give marks S2: Yes, I do..

III.New lesson(34’)

Teacher’s activities Students’activities
PRESENTATION :12 ms - Listening to the words.
1.Vocabulary: ROR: - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual.
-by car: bằng xe ô tô (visual) Correcting the mistakes.
-by bus: bằng xe buýt (visual) - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-by bike:bằng xe đạp(visual) - Copying the words.
-by motorbike: bằng xe máy(visual) - Reading the text in silence.
-by train: bằng tàu hỏa(visual) - Practicing in groups & in pairs.
-by plane: bằng máy bay -Correcting the pronunciation.
Walk (v): đi bộ *Model sentence:
+ Introduces the words by explaining the •How do you go to school ?
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. does he work ?
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). • I travel / go by bike.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects •He travels / goes by car.
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - Making sentences for the next cues.
2. Presentation text: C1-2/ P78-79.(5ms) - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence. * Example exchange:
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to S1: How does [Lien] go to school ?
practice in groups & in pairs. S2: She goes by [bike].
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S1: How does [Mr. Nam] travel to work ?
PRACTICE ( 8ms). S2: He travels by [train].
3. Substitution drill: C1-2/ P78-79.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss - Practicing the game in two groups.
to practice. - Choosing the name to make the question &
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss answer.
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
* 11 pictures cues:
Lien; Thu; Tuan; Hoa; Huong; Mr. Nam; Mrs. Mr Hai Mrs Lan Mrs Dung
Lan; Mr. Ba; Miss. Hoa; Mr Kim;
PRODUCTION (7ms)
4. Noughts & Crosses:
- Introduces the content & helps Ss to practice
******************************************************************************* 89
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
the game in two groups.
- Asks Ss to choose the name to make the
question & answer.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
Mr Hai Mrs Lan Mrs Dung
Thu Mr Kim Lien Thu Mr Kim Lien
Tuan Miss Hoa Mr Ba




Tuan Miss Hoa Mr Ba


IV.CONSOLIDATION (2M ):
Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
- Retell the main points : How do/does + S + go/ travel…?
S + go(es)/travel(s) + by …
V.Homeworks: (2M ):
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange
- Read the text C4 – P80 at home & prepare the times you do your daily routine
- Prepare for next lesso



WEEK 16.
Date of preparing: 05/12/2010 - Date of teaching: 8/12/2010.

Unit 7 : Your house
Period 45.



Lesson 5: C4-5. On the move
A/The aims and the objectives:
- Helps Ss to read a text about Hoang’s daily routine for further practice in Simple present
habitual actions.
By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the text talk about
their daily routine.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially speaking and listening skills)

B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.

******************************************************************************* 90
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.
II.Checking up: (5’)
-Ask Ss to ask and answer about transportation (su chuyen cho) using:
+ I/go/School/car + Mrs Lan /travel/HN/plane
=>How do you go to school? => How does Mrs Lan travel to HN?
I go by car She travels by plane.
-Correct, remarks and give marks.

III.New lesson(34’)

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

PRE-READING (10 M). Working in individual to predict what time
1. Open prediction: Hoang does the following things.
*Set the scene: you are going to read the - Comparing & giving their prediction.
text about Hoang.
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to What time?
work in individual to predict what time He gets up 5.30
Hoang does the following things. He leaves the house 6.30
- Asks Ss to compare & give their School starts 7.00
prediction. School ends 11.30
Show a poster with the table. He has lunch 12.00
- Comments S’s prediction.
- Reading the text & getting the details &
WHILE-READING: 15 M checking the prediction
2. Presentation text: C4 – P80. - Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text & - Working in pairs to match the questions to
get the details & check the prediction. the answers.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text. - Giving the answer keys.
- Corrects comments. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
3. Comprehension questions: C4 – P80.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to * Answers:
work in pairs to match the questions to the a. Hoang gets up at 5.30.
answers. b. He goes to school at 6.30.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments. c. No, he doesn’t.
d. Yes, he does.
* Questions: e. Classes start at 7.00.
a. What time does Hoang get up ? f. They end at 11.30
b. What time does he go to school ?
c. Does he go to school by car ? Working in pairs to ask each other about the
d. Does he walk to school ? time they do these things & filling the
e. What time do classes start ? information into the table.
f. What time do they end ? - Comparing& reporting the information.

******************************************************************************* 91
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
*POST- READING: 10 M Actions What time?
4. Survey: Mai Nam
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to Get up 5.30 5.45
work in pairs to ask each other about the Go to school …
time they do these things & fill the Classes end
information into the table. Go home
- Asks Ss to compare & report the Have lunch
information. Ask and answer the questions.
- Comments S’s information.


IV.CONSOLIDATION (2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Retel the main points of the lesson: Present simple tense and Hoang’s routines.

V.Homeworks (2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the text.
- Write about your time to do your daily things.
- Prepare the picture on page 82.




WEEK 17.
Date of preparing: 09/12/2010 - Date of teaching: 12/12/2010.
Period 46

Revision
A/The aims and the objectives:
- To Help Ss to review all structures grammar and vocabulary in Unit 7
- To help Ss improve their 4 skills.
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer with:
“ Is there … and Are there ….?”
The verb “To Be”
Wh-qs … : How do/does + S + go /travel…? – By ….
Ss practice 4 skills fluently
B/ Preparation:
T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
C/ Procedure:
I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.

******************************************************************************* 92
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II.Checking up: (5’)
-Ask Ss to ask and answer about transportation (su chuyen cho) using:
+ Ba/go/School/car + Mrs Lien /travel/HN/plane
=>How does Ba go to school? => How does Mrs Lien travel to HN?
He goes by car She travels by plane.
+ Then T asks Ss some questions:
What time does your father/mother get up?
What time do they leave the house?
Do they go to work by motorbike?
-Correct, remarks and give marks.
III.New lesson(34’)
Teacher’s activities Students’activities
I/ Grammar:
 Is there a/an + N + prep + N (Place) …?
Yes, there is
No,there isn’t
 Are there + (any ) N(s) + prep + N(place) ?
Yes,there are
No,there aren’t - Retell some old
 How do you go /travel….? structures grammar.
I go/travel by …. -Copy down and explain the
 How does he/she go/ travel ….? meaning.
He/she goes/travels by … Give some example.
 Do you live in town? Yes/No.
 Does He/she live in city? Yes/No .
 Wh-questions
 To be
II/ Exercises:
EX1: I/ Fill in each blank with the suitable preposition.
1. Look _______________the house.
2. There is a big yard __________front _______ the house.
3. There are many trees _____________the house.
4. There is a well____________the left of the house. Give answer keys
5. To the right_____________the house, there is a garden.
6. I live _______________a house.
7. There are many people ______________the street.
8. They work ________________a restaurant.
9. Their house is next ____________a booksrore.
10.His father works _____________a factory.
11. The restaurant is __________the bakery and the toystore.
12. The police station is ____________the bank.
- 2 sts to come to the board
13. There are many flowers ______________the park.
and write the for of the 2
14. There is a river _____________our house.
structures
15. The children are _______________the bookstore.
16. I get up …….6.00 every morning.
- Sts copy

******************************************************************************* 93
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
17. She has breakfast at 6.10. …the morning.
18.The toystore is ……….the drugstore.
19.My house is next …….the park.
20.My grandmother lives …….Nghe An.
21. She has Literature ……… Monday and Friday. Ss do exercises
EX 2:Use the suggested words to write a passage about Go to the board one by one
Minh: Minh/ 12 years old.He/ grade 6. Everyday he/ get up/ six.
He/ have breakfast/ half past six/ and he/ go to school/ aquarte/
seven. He/ walk/ school. He/ have classes/ from seven/ eleven
thirty. Now he/ in his room. He/ watch TV.
EX 3: Fill in the missing words then answer the questions.
Hello. My name (1) .............Lan. I’m twelve (2) .............old. I’m a - student to come to the
student. There (3)…………. four people in my family. My father board and write the for of the
is(4)……….. engineer. He is forty years(5)…………. My mother is 2 structures
a (6)…………….she teaches at a school near my house.
EX4: Read this passage and answer the questions. - Sts copy
I am Hoa. I get up at six every morning. I take a shower , then I
have a big breakfast. I go to school at a quarter to seven. I have
classes from seven to a quarter past eleven. I have lunch at half
past eleven. In the afternoon, I play sports. I go home at five
o’clock. In the evening, I watch television, then I do my
homework. I go to bed at ten o’clock..
Questions: - Sts work in 3 groups
1. When does she get up? - Sts come to the board and
2. What time does she go to school? write as many words about
3. Does she take a shower every morning? their topic as they can
4. What does she do then?
5. Does she have lunch at twelve?
6. What does she do at five o’clock?
7. What does she do in the evening?
8. What time does she
EX5: Choose the best answer:
1. Are there ..............trees behind the house?
A. any B.the C. those
2. This is a photo of Mai’s house. To the right of ..........house
there is a well.
A. the B. a C. these
3. Is there ..............garden behind the house?
A.a B. the C. any
4. There aren’t ...............behind the house.
A. any trees B. any tree C. trees - Sts work in pair to do exes
5. In front of the house there is a .............. - Sts give their answers
A. beautiful flower garden B. Flower garden beautiful
C. beautiful garden flower
6. I live in an apartment .......................... One by one go to the board
A. in town B. in city C. in the town to do exersies
7. Is ............noisy in the country?
A.it B. there C. every thing
8. The city is noisy, but the country is ..................
A. quiet B. peace C. silent

******************************************************************************* 94
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
9. Chi .............in the country.
A. doesn’t live B. does lives C. don’t live
10. I live in a house .............a garden.
A. with B. there is C. has
11. I go to school ...............
A. by bike B. by a bike C. by the bike
12. ...........does Miss Hoa go to school?
A. How B. What C. By how
13. A.Mr Hai travels to work by train.
B. Mr Hai travels to the work by train.
C. Mr Hai travels to work by the train.
14. A. Mai walks to school.
B. Mai goes to school by walking
C. Mai goes walking to school.
15. I ................ every day
A. walk home B. walk to the home C. walk to home
16. The school is near my house. .............I walk.
A. so B. but C. then

IV/ Consolidation:
Retell the main points of this lesson.
V/ Homework:
Do all exercises
Learn by heart vocab and structures grammar
Prepare for next lesson.




Preparing's day: 30/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 8: out and about
Lesson 1: what are you doing?( A1-3)
Period: 44
A.Objectives: :
- Helps Ss to practice in Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/
he ” to talk about actions happening now. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to
talk about actions happening now.
I.Knowledge:
: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
******************************************************************************* 95
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II.Checking:

III.New lesson:
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: ROR:
(to) play video games;
(to) ride a bike;
(to) drive;
(to) wait for.
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. Correcting the mistakes.
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying the words.
corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Presentation text: A1- P82 (Top 3
Pictures only ).
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Reading the text in silence.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence. - Practicing in groups & in individual.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss -Correcting the pronunciation.
to practice in groups & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. *Model sentence:
- Introduces the form & use of the grammar. I ’m [am] playing games
* Present progressive positive statements: He/ She ’s is riding a bike.
+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing. driving.
+ Use: Talk about happening things.




******************************************************************************* 96
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
3. Picture drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Reads the first model for example & asks - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs . * Example exchange:
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
* Note: using the pictures on page 82 for a) I’m [walking to school ].
the cues. b) He’s / She’s [waiting for a bus].
III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M
4. Noughts & Crosses:
- Introduces the content & helps Ss to - Practicing the game in two groups.
practice the game in two groups. - Choosing the name to make the question &
- Asks Ss to choose the name to make the answer.
question & answer.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
Walk to school Drive a bus Travel by bus
Wait for a train Ride a bike Play a game
Go by plane Drive a car Ride a motorbike
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Present progressive positive statements
with “I/ She/ he ” to talk about actions happening now:
* Present progressive positive statements:
+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.
+ Use: Talk about happening things.
V. Homeworks( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.
- Exercise: Write five sentences about things are happening.
- Read the text A1 – P82 at home & prepare the pictures on P82.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................


******************************************************************************* 97
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Preparing's day: 1/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 8: out and about
Lesson 2: what are you doing?( A2,4-7)
Period: 45

A.Objectives: :
A. - Helps Ss to practice in Present progressive with “WH - question” with she / he /
they to talk about actions happening now. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able
to ask & answer about actions happening now.
I.Knowledge:
: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
-“WH - question” with she / he / they .
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II.Checking:

III.New lesson:
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1. Presentation text: A2 / P83 .
Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Reading the text in silence.
text. - Practicing in groups & in individual.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence. -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps
Ss to practice in groups & in individual. *Model sentence:
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments. - What ‘s (is) he / she doing ?
- Introduces the form & use of the are you / they
grammar.
- He / she ‘s (is) studying.
* Present progressive WH- question: I ’m (am)

+Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She+ V-ing?
We/ You/ They

******************************************************************************* 98
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
+ Use: Asking about things happening
now.
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
2. Picture drill:
Introduces the example exchange & - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
Helps Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Reads the first model for example & - Practicing in groups with teacher & in
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in closed pairs .
individual. - Correcting the pronunciation
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. * Example exchange:
- Practices with Ss in the whole class & + Teacher – whole class drill:
checks S’s practicing in groups & in a) S1: What‘s he doing ?
pairs . S2: He is doing his homework.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & + Closed pair work drill:
comments. b) S1: What are they doing ?
S2: They’re waiting for a bus.
* Note: using the pictures on page 83 for
the cues.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M
3. Answer given: A6 - P85.
- Gives the answers on the board & asks - Reading the text in part 6 on page 85 &
Ss to read the text in part 6 on page 85 & working in pairs to make the questions .
work in pairs to make the questions . - Comparing the questions.
- Asks Ss to compare the questions. – Giving the questions by role playing in
– Asks Ss to give the questions by role pairs.
playing in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation &
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & Commenting the questions.
Comments the questions.
* Answer given: * Question keys:
a) Mr. Ha is a businessman. He is going a) Who is this / Who are they ?
to Hanoi. b) What is he / she doing ?
b) Miss. Hoa is a teacher. She is going to are they
school. c) Where is he/she going ?
c) Mr. Tuan & Mrs. Vui are doctors. are they
They are going to the hospital. d) How is she / he traveling ?
are they
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


******************************************************************************* 99
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Present progressive with “WH -
question” with she / he / they to talk about actions happening now
* Present progressive WH- question:
+Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She+ V-ing?
We/ You/ They
V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the grammar & the example exchange.
- Exercise: 1-P72; 2-P72; 3-P73;
- Read the text B1 – P86 at home & prepare the pictures on P86.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................




WEEK: 16
Preparing's day:3 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 8: out and about
Lesson 3: A TRUCK DRIVE ( B1)
Period: 46
A.Objectives: :
- Helps Ss to read a picture story about a truck driver. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas & get some information about the text.
I.Knowledge:
: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
-“WH - question” with she / he / they .
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence

******************************************************************************* 100
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II.Checking:
III.New lesson:

TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION
Time: 10 M.
1. Vocabulary: - Matching.
a truck driver (n); quầy bán thực phẩm
a farmer (n); người lái xe tải
a foodstall; dỡ hàng xuống
(to) load chất hàng lên
(to0 unload; đến
(to) arrive at; nông dân

- Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in
meaning, using the situation. individual.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). - Giving the meaning by matching & the
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying the words.
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning by matching the words to the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Ordering statements .
- Gives the un-order statements about the - Working in groups to guess the order of
text & asks Ss to work in groups to guess the these statements.
order of these statements. - Comparing their ordering.
- Asks Ss to compare their ordering. - Giving their ordering.
- Asks Ss give their ordering.
- Comments S’s ordering.

* Statements:
1. going to Hanoi. I think I read
2. Meeting the farmer. a c
3. Having breakfast b
4. Going to a farm c
5. Loading vegetable in the truck d
6. Unloading the truck e
******************************************************************************* 101
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
f

II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M.
3. Presentation text: B1 – P86.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the story - Reading story & get the details.
about the truck driver & get the details. - Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter. - Checking the ordering.
- Asks Ss to check their ordering. * Answer keys:
- Corrects comments. a: 4; b: 2; c: 5; d: 1; e: 6; f:3.
4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P87.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work - Working in pairs to match the questions to
in pairs to match the questions to the the answers.
answers. - Giving the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
* Questions: * Answers:
a. What does Mr. Quang do ? a. He is a truck driver.
b. Where is he going at 5.am ? b. He is going to a farm.
c. Who is waiting for him ? c. A farmer is waiting for him.
d. Where is he taking vegetables ? d. He’s taking vegetables at the farm
e. What is he doing at 7.00 ? e. He is eating his breakfast.
f. Where is he eating ? f. He’s eating at the foodstall.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M
5. Chain game:
- Introduces the requirements & helps Ss to - Playing the game in the whole class by
play the game in the whole class by talking talking about Mr. Quang routine.
about Mr. Quang routine. -Correcting the pronunciation &
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments commenting the game.
the game. * Example:
S1: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the
morning.
S2: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the
morning and he is going to a farm.
S3: …
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homework ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the main idea of the story.
- Exercise: 1-P73; 2-P74 workbook;
- Read the text C1-P89 at home & prepare the road sign.

******************************************************************************* 102
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day:4 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 8: out and about
Lesson 4: ROAD SIGNS. (C1-2)
Period: 47
A.Objectives: :
- Helps Ss to practice in “CAN / CAN’T” statements & traffic vocabulary. By
the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what you are allowed & not allowed to
do on the road.
I.Knowledge:
: - “CAN / CAN’T”
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II.Checking:
III.New lesson:
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 10M.
1 Vocabulary: Slap the board.
a policeman (n);
difficult (adj);
a sign (n);
one-way (n);
(to) park;
(to) go straight.
(to) turn left / right;
Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in
meaning, using the situation & gives individual & Correcting the mistakes
example. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). - Copying the words.
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
******************************************************************************* 103
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Noughts & Crosses:
- Introduces the name of the places & - Working in groups to make questions &
divides Ss into two groups to practice by answers about what people doing.
making questions & answers about what - Giving the answer keys by role-playing in
people doing. pairs.
- Asks S’s to give the answer keys by role- - Correcting S’s pronunciation.
playing in pairs. * Example exchange:
- Corrects & comments the game. S1: What is he doing ?
S2: He’s driving a car..
(drive) a car (ride) a bike (walk)
(ride) a motorbike (park) (wait for ) a bus
(turn) left (go) straight (turn) right

II.PRACTICE Time: 20-M.
3. Presentation text: C1 – P89.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Reading the text in silence.
text. -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Comprehension questions: - Working in pairs to answer the questions.
- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions. - Giving the answers & correcting.
- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. * Answers:
* Questions: a. He is a policeman.
a. What does Hoan do ? b. Yes, it is. Because it is …….
b. Is his job difficult ?. Tell me why ? c. You can park here.
c. What does this sign mean ? …..
* Note: Points to the road signs & asks Ss
to explain the meaning.
2. Picture drill: - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps - Making sentences for the next cues.
Ss to practice. - Practicing in groups with teacher & in closed
- Reads the first model for example & asks pairs .
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation

******************************************************************************* 104
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. * Example exchange:
- Practices with Ss in the whole class & a) S1: What does this sign mean ?
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . S2: He is doing his homework.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.




III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M
3.Complete sentences: C2-P89-90.
- Introduces the requirements & the road - Adding CAN or CAN’T to the gap base on
sign then asks Ss to add CAN or CAN’T to the signs .
the gap base on the signs . – Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing in
– Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing pairs.
in pairs. -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & Comments * Answer keys:
the questions. a. can; b. can’t; c. can; d. can’t.
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
- Asks Ss to give the traffic vocabulary & the road signs. & explain the meaning.
V. Homework ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the example exchange.
- Exercise: 1- 2-P75 workbook.
-Read the text C3 – P90 at home & prepare the pictures on P90 & the road signs..
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 6/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 8: out and about
Lesson 5: ROAD SIGNS. ( C1-2.)
Period: 48
A.Objectives: :
- Helps Ss to read a text about road signs to understand MUST & MUSTN’T
for obligation / prohibition. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the
detail of the text talk about the obligation / prohibition.
I.Knowledge:
******************************************************************************* 105
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
: - MUST & MUSTN’T for obligation / prohibition.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II.Checking:
III.New lesson:

TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-READING Time: 15M.
1. Vocabulary: - Matching.
dangerous (adj);
an accident (n);
an intersection (n);
(to) go fast (v);
(to) warn us (v);
(to) help us (v);
(to) slow down (v);
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in
meaning, using the situation. individual.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). - Giving the meaning by matching & the
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning by matching the words to the
meaning & Corrects the pronunciation.
2. Wordsquare:
- Introduces the wordsquare & asks Ss to - Working in groups to find out the 20 words
work in groups to find out the 20 words related to the traffic.
related to the traffic. - Comparing & giving their prediction.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. R O A D S I G N D
- Comments S’s the game. W K O R X H I S A
* Answer key: A C C I D E N T N
road signs; accident; travel; us; left; R U C D R L O R G
right; go fast N R A E I P T A E
truck S T R A V E L I R
warn; stop; turn; car; ride; go; drive; T U S L E F T G O
******************************************************************************* 106
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
help; straight; dangerous. O R I G H T O H U
P N G O F A S T S

2. True / False prediction:
- Introduces the statements & asks Ss to work - Working in individual to look at the picture
in pairs to look at the pictures on page 90 & in C4-P90 & choose the correct statement for
choose the correct statements for each one each one.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. - Comparing & giving their prediction.
- Comments S’s the game.
a. Slow down b. Turn left c. Turn right d. Slow down
Go straight Don’t turn left Go straight or turn left Don’t go straight
ahead
e. Park here f. Cars & trucks go here g. Don’t go straight h. Park here
Don’t park here Motorbike go here Don’t turn right or left Don’t park here
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M
3. Presentation text: C3 – P90.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text & get - Reading the text & getting the details &
the details & check the prediction. checking the prediction
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text. - Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.
* Answer keys:
a. Slow down b. Turn left c. Go straight or turn d. Don’t go straight
left ahead
e. Don’t park here f. Cars & trucks go here g. Don’t turn right or h. Park here
left
III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
4. Word cue drill: C4-P91.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. * Example exchange:
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in S1: What does this sign mean ?
groups & in pairs . S2: You must [slow down].
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.



IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M)

******************************************************************************* 107
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the road signs.
- Prepare for the grammar practice.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................




WEEK: 17
Preparing's day: 10 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Grammar practice
Period: 49
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to further practice in Simple present vs. Present progressive. By the end
of the lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars completely .
I.Knowledge:
: - Simple present vs. Present progressive.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II.Checking:
III.New lesson:
TEACHER’S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS



******************************************************************************* 108
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M.
1. Revision:
- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Simple - Giving the form & use of the Simple
present vs. Present progressive present vs. Present progressive.
*Form: - Giving example.
* Present simple: S + V-s / es + O. * Example
* Use: Talk about things happen regularly. - I go to school.
* Present progressive: S + tobe + V-ing. - I am going to school.:
* Use: Talk about thing happening now.
- Corrects & comments.
II.PRACTICE Time 20 M .
1. Present progressive with I / She / He.
* Chain game:
- Introduces the topic & asks Ss to practice in - Practicing in groups, using the past simple
groups, using the past simple to talk about to talk about their vacation.
their vacation. - Giving the answers.
- Asks Ss to give the answers. - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. * Model sentences:
S1: I’m watching TV.
S2: She is watching TV & I’m playing
video games.
S3: She is watching TV, he is playing video
games & I’m …etc.
2. Present progressive with all persons
* Complete the sentences: GP 2 – P92.
- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to -Working in pairs to use the verbs in the
work in pairs to use the verbs in the parentheses to complete the sentences in
parentheses to complete the sentences in present progressive.
present progressive. - Comparing the keys & give the keys.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Correcting the keys.
- Asks Ss to give the keys by repeating in
chorus. Then corrects S’s pronunciation. * Answer keys:
* Cues: a. Minh is riding his bike.
a. Minh….his bike. ( ride ) b. They are waiting for a bus.
b. They ……for a bus. ( wait ) c. She is watching TV.
c. She ……TV. (watch ) d. We are playing soccer.
d. We ……soccer. ( play ) e. He is listening to music.
e. He ……to music. ( listen ) f. They are walking to school.
f. They ……to school. ( walk ) g. He is traveling to Hanoi.

******************************************************************************* 109
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
g. He …… to Hanoi. ( travel )


III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M.
3. Present simple vs. Present progressive:
* Contrast: GP 5 – P94.
- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to -Working in pairs to use the verbs in the
work in pairs to use the verbs in the parentheses to complete the sentences in
parentheses to complete the sentences in present progressive & in simple present.
present progressive & in simple present. - Comparing the keys & give the keys.
* Example: - Correcting the keys.
- (play) They play volleyball everyday.
They’re playing volleyball now.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Asks Ss to give the keys
- Corrects & comments. * Answer keys:
a. (ride) She …her bike to school. a. She rides her bike to school.
She …her bike now. She is riding her bike now.
b. (go) We …to school by bus everyday. b. We go to school by bus everyday.
We …to school by bus now. We’re going to school by bus now.
c. (walk) I …to school everyday. c. I walk to school everyday.
I …to school now. I’m walking to school now.
d. (drive) He … his truck. d. He drives his truck.
He … his truck at the moment. He’s driving his truck at the moment
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the grammar & the modal sentence & do the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the grammars: Preposition of places; Must & Can; & Questions word for
the next grammar practice: 3- 4- 6 – 7/ P 93-94..
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 15 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Review(1)
******************************************************************************* 110
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Period: 50
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to further practice with making suggestions, arrangements & accepting
the invitation. By the end of the lesson, Ss can use these grammars correctly.
I.Knowledge:
: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson
Teacher's activities Students'activities
1. Present simple tense.
a. With (to) be:(20ms)
-T asks ss to remember the way to use the -Ss remember and answer the
structure,use. question of teacher.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.
-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to
use them.
Structure:
Kh¼ng ®Þnh: S + (to) be +(a/an) + O. -Ss give examples.
Phñ ®Þnh: S + (to) be-not +(a/an) + O. + He is a teacher.
Nghi vÊn:(to) be + S +a/an + O ?. + Nam isnot a student.
Tr¶ lêi: Yes, S + (to)be + Is she tall?
No, S + (to) be-not Yes, she is/ No, she isn’t.
...etc
-T asks ss to give more example - Ss take notes.
b.Example:
1.They are students.
2.He isnot an engineer.
3. Are they students ?
Yes, they are. - Ss copy the notes and learn by
No, they aren’t heart.
T controls and corrects.
Notes:
I + am = I’m

******************************************************************************* 111
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
She,He,It + is = she’s; he’s; it’s
You, They, We + are = you’re; they’re; we’re.
2.Exercise:
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the Practicing in groups.
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer. -Expected:
-T comment and correct. 1. He is a nurse.
a.§iÒn am, is, are vµo « trèng.(10ms) 2.They are doctors.
1. He....................a nurse. 3.Peter is a student.
2.They ..........................doctors. 4.I am small but my father is
3.Peter.....................a student. big.
4.I........................small but my father..............big. 5.Miss Mai is always early.
5.Miss Mai.....................always early. 6. We are teachers and they are
6. We................ teachers and they workers.
..................workers. -Ss go to the board write the
answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.
b. Change 6 sentences into negative
sentenses.(10ms)
Example: Practicing in groups.
1. He isn’t a nurse. -Ss go to the board write the
2.They are not doctors. answer
3.Peter is not a student. Example:
......etc. 1. He isn’t a nurse.
2.They are not doctors.
- Introduces the way to practice & devides the 3.Peter is not a student.
class into 2 groups to practice.
- Helps Ss to practice. - Correcting the answer keys.
-Calls ss to go to the board to write the answer.
- Corrects & comments
IV. Consolidation.(1ms)
-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
V.Homework.(1ms)
-Preparing the simple present tense .
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................

******************************************************************************* 112
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 16/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Review(2)
Period: 51
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to further practice with making suggestions, arrangements & accepting
the invitation. By the end of the lesson, Ss can use these grammars correctly.
I.Knowledge:
: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson

Teacher's activities Students'activities
1.Present simple tense.
a. With regular verbs.:(20ms)
-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
-Ss remember and answer the
structure,use.
question of teacher.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and
write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.
-T asks Ss to give the structures and the
way to use them.
Structure:
-Ss give examples.
Kh¼ng ®Þnh: S + V(s/es) + O.
+ He teaches in a school..
Phñ ®Þnh: S + don’t/doesn’t + V(inf) + O.
Nghi vÊn: Do/ Does + S + V(inf) + O ?. + Nam doesn’t play volleyball..
+ Do you want to learn English?
Tr¶ lêi: Yes, S + do/does
No, S + don’t/ doesn’t. Yes, I do/ No,I don’t.
...etc
- Ss take notes.
-T asks ss to give more example
b.Example:
1.They play chess.
******************************************************************************* 113
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
2.He works in a hospital.
3. Does nam like oranges?
Yes, he does - Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.
No, he doesn’t.
T controls and corrects.
Notes:
She,He,It + V(s/es)
You, They, We + V(inf) Practicing in groups.

2.Exercise:
a.Put the following verbs in simple
presnt.(20ms)
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises. -Expected:
-T asks ss the way to do. 1. opens........closes
- T calls ss to go to the board write the 2.don’t use
answer. 3.play.........don’t play.
-T comment and correct. 4.does the “decide“ mean?
1. The swimming bath..................(open) at 5.work..........doesn’t work......
9:00 and ..............(close) at 18:30 every day.
2.I have a car but I.................(not-use) it -Ss go to the board write the answer.
very often. - Correcting the answer keys.
3.I.......................(play) the piano, but
I...................(not-play) very well.
4.I don’t understand the word”decide”. keys.
What.........................(“decide“/ mean)?
5.I ............................(work) in a bank.
Nam.........................(work) in an office


IV. Consolidation.(1ms)
-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
V.Homework.(1ms)
-Preparing the simple present tense .
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

******************************************************************************* 114
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

WEEK: 18
Preparing's day: 17/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Review(3)
Period: 52
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the grammar to prepare for the first
final semester test.
I.Knowledge:
: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson
TEACHER’S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Gaps fill: 1 / P 40.
-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to - Working in individual to fill in the gaps.
work in individual to fill in the gaps. -Comparing in pairs & giving the information.
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs. *Answer keys:
-Asks Ss to give the information. 1./ am – am – are – is – are.
-Corrects & comments. 2./ am – is – is – are – are.
3./ a) are – am; b) is – is.
c) is – isn’t ; d) are – aren’t.
2. Noughts & Crosses:
-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play - Playing in two groups.
in two groups by choosing the cue & They/teachers We/students She/a nurse
making question. He/an engineer I/a student They/sister
-Corrects & comments the game. You / 12 We/brothers She/a doctor
II.PRACTICE Time 10 M .
3. Present progressive :
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Reading the text in silence.
text. - Practicing in groups & in individual.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence. -Correcting the pronunciation.

******************************************************************************* 115
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Introduces the model exchange & helps *Model sentence:
Ss to practice in groups & in individual. I ’m [am] playing games
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & He/ She ’s [ is] riding a bike.
comments. driving.
- Introduces the form & use of the We/ you/ ‘re (are) playing they.
grammar.
* Present progressive :
+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.
We/ You/ They
+ Use: Talk about things happening
now..
III.PRODUCTION Time: 15 M.
4. Yes / No question Answer drill: A6-
P55. * Example exchange: (Picture on P36)
- Introduces the example exchange & S1: Do you / they play volleyball ?
Helps Ss to practice. S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.
- Reads the first model for example & S1: Does she / he play soccer ?
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he doesn’t
individual. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.
3. Find someone who:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Working in groups using the example
work in groups using the example exchange to ask & answer about the place
exchange to ask & answer about the place where they live & fill the name into the table.
where they live & fill the name into the
table. - Comparing & reporting the information.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the * Example exchange:
information. S1: Do you live in town ?
- Comments S’s information. S2: No, I don’t. / Yes, I do.
S1: What your name ?
S2: My name is…
S1: How do you spell it ?
Find someone who lives… Name
… in town
…in the country

******************************************************************************* 116
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
… near a lake
…next to a market
…opposite a paddy field
…near a post office
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M )
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the grammar & the modal sentence re-do the test at home.
- Prepare for the First final semester test.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 20/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
Review(4)
Period: 53
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the grammar to prepare for the first
final semester test.
I.Knowledge:
- The present progressive tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson
Teacher's activities Students'activities
a.Structure:(10ms)
-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and -Ss remember and answer the
write. question of teacher.
-T controls and corrects with ss.
******************************************************************************* 117
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
-T asks Ss to give the structures and the
way to use them.
Form:
Kh¼ng ®Þnh: S + (to) be +V-ing + O. -Ss give examples.
Phñ ®Þnh: S + (to)be-not + V-ing+ O. + He is teaching in a school at the
Nghi vÊn: (to) Be + S + V-ing + O ?. moment.
Tr¶ lêi: Yes, S + (to)be + Nam isn’t playing volleyball at
No, S + (to)be-not present...
Use: DiÓn t¶ mét hµnh ®éng ®ang x¶y ra t¹i + Are you studying now?
thêi ®iÓm nãi. Yes, I am/ No, I am not.
*Th­êng dïng víi c¸c tr¹ng tõ nh­: ...etc
Now, right now, at the moment, at present. - Ss take notes.
-T asks ss to give more example
b.Example:
1.They are playing chess now.
2.He is working in a hospital now.
3. Is Nam doing his homework? - Ss copy the notes and learn by
Yes, he is heart.
No, he isn’t
T controls and corrects.
Notes:
I+ am + V-ing
She,He,It + is + v-ing Practicing in groups.
You, They, We + are + v-ing
2.Exercise:
a.Put the following verbs in present
progressive tense.(20ms)
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the -Expected:
exercises. 1. is opening
-T asks ss the way to do. 2.are playing
- T calls ss to go to the board write the 3.isn’t working
answer. 4.is working
-T comment and correct. 5.is snowing
1. The swimming bath..................(open) now
2.They.......................(play) the piano now -Ss go to the board write the answer.
3.Lan............................( not-work) in a bank - Correcting the answer keys.
at the moment
4. Nam.........................(work) in an office at
present.

******************************************************************************* 118
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
5.Look! It............................(snow).
b. Use the verbs given in present
progressive tense to complete the following Practicing in groups.
sentences.(12ms) -Ss go to the board write the answer
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the
answer. Example:
-T comment and correct. 1. is becoming
read rain become Shine get listen 2.is getting
1.The cost of living..................higher. 3. am listening
2.George now can speak French fluently. 4. is raining
His French............................better. 5. is reading
3.Keep silent, please. I....................to the 6. is shining
teacher.
4.We can go out because it.....................
5.Where’s your father? – - Correcting the answer keys.
He.........................a newspaper in his room.
6.It’s very hot today. The
sun.......................above.
IV. Consolidation.(2ms)
-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
V.Homework.(1ms)
-Preparing the present progressive tense
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................




The first term examination
Time: 45minutes
Period: 54
(§Ò vµ ®¸p ¸n do phßng GD-§T Gio Linh ra)

******************************************************************************* 119
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************




WEEK: 19
Preparing's day: 30/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:

******************************************************************************* 120
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Unit 9: the body
Lesson 1: parts of the body.( A1-2)
Period: 55
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in nouns to talk about the parts of the body. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the parts of their body.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
Asks Ss some questions about the function of their parts of the body.
? What does your head/ hands/ legs/ … for ?
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary:
his head / chest;
his shoulders/ arms / hands
legs/ feet / fingers / toes.
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
corrects the mistakes. - Copying the words.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Rub out and Remember:
- Introduces the words & helps Ss to read to - Reading the words to remember.
remember. - Rewriting the words in the circle.
- Erasers the words in un-order & asks Ss to - Correcting the pronunciation & the
read. mistakes.
- Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the circle

******************************************************************************* 121
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
his head his chest; his toes.

his shoulders his arms his hands

his legs his feet his fingers

II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.
3. Picture drill: A1 - P 96.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Reads the first model for example & asks - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. * Example exchange: A2-P97.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing S1: What is that ?
in groups & in pairs . S2: That is his head.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S1: What are those ?
S2: Those are his shoulders.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M
3. Wordsquare:
- Introduces the word-square & asks Ss to - Working in groups to find out the hidden
work in groups to find out the 14 hidden words.
words. - Giving the words in two groups by circling
– Asks Ss to give the words in two groups the words & put them into a present
by circling the words & put them into a progressive statement & write on the board.
present progressive statement & write on the
board. H E A D O X W T
- Corrects & Comments the game. A K L A C T F E
T R A V H A O W
* Answer keys: F I N G E R O T
HEAD; FINGER;SHOULDER H D R I S M T O
HANDS; FOOT. Q E M A T S T E
O R R H A N D S
ARMS; LEGS; CHEST; TOES S H O U L D E R

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.

******************************************************************************* 122
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Exercise: A1- P84. Workbook.
- Read the text A3 – P97 at home & prepare the pictures on P97.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................



Preparing's day: 1/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:

Unit 9: the body
Lesson 2: parts of the body.( A1-2)(cont.)
Period: 56

A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in adjectives to describe physical appearance. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to describe theirs physical appearance.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision

Hang man.
- Introduces the symbols & asks Ss ------- ( fingers)
to give the letters to form the ----- (chest) ---- (arm)
words. ---- (feet) ---- (legs)
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.

III. New lesson :




******************************************************************************* 123
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary:
tall  short (adj);
fat  thin (adj);
heavy  light (adj).
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times individual.
). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
corrects the mistakes. - Copying the words.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Noughts & Crosses:
- Introduces the cues & divides the class - Playing the game.
into two groups to play the game. - Corrects & Comments the game.
- Corrects & Comments the game. tall big Fat
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. small thin Short
quiet light heavy
II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.
3. True / False repetition drill: A4 –P98.
- Reads the cues & asks Ss to repeat in - Repeating if the cue is true & keep silent if
chorus if the cue is true & keep silent if the cue is false.
the cue is false. - Correcting the pronunciation
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
* Teacher: * Student:
P. a: She’s thin She’s tall Repeat Repeat
P. b: He’s thin He’s He’s fat Silent Repeat Repeat
P. c: He’s short He’s Silent Repeat Repeat
P. d: small He’s tall heavy She’s Silent Silent Repeat Repeat
She’s thin She’s tall She’s fat
short
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M
3. Prediction: A4 – P98.
- Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to - Working in individual to predict the
work in individual to predict the adjectives to fill in.
******************************************************************************* 124
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
adjectives to fill in. - Comparing & give their prediction.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their * Answer:
prediction . Pa. Thin / light; Pb. Fat / heavy.
- Helps Ss to listen to the tape & check Pc. Tall / heavy; Pd. Short / fat.
their prediction.
- Corrects & Comments S’s prediction.
4. Grid: With answer keys.
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Listening to the tape & writing the order of
listen to the tape & write the order of the the people described.
people described. - Comparing & giving their information.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
information.
- Corrects & Comments S’s information.
Tall ? short ? thin ? fat ? Listen
Picture a ( thin - tall ) 4
Picture b ( short – fat ) 3
Picture c ( tall – fat ) 2
Picture d ( short – fat ) 1
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.
- Exercise: A3 & 4- P84. Workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on P100.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 3/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 9: the body
Lesson 3: faces(b1)
Period: 57
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in face vocabulary ( nouns & adjectives )to describe people’s
faces. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe their faces.
I.Knowledge:
******************************************************************************* 125
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
Pelmanism.
- Introduces the words & asks Ss to choose the pairs of antonym adjectives.

FAT TALL HEAVY BIG NOISY
THIN SHORT LIGHT SMALL QUIET
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.

III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: ROR.
his eyes/ ears/ lips/ teeth
his hair/ nose/ mouth.
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the
the mistakes. pronunciation.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the - Copying the words.
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Slap the board.
- Introduces the picture of the people’s face & - Playing the game.
divides the class into two groups to play the - Commenting the game.
game.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.




******************************************************************************* 126
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
His eyes his hair




His nose
His lips his teeth his ear
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
3. Presentation text: B1 – 100.
- Introduces the six pictures on page 100 (a – f) - Practicing in individual.
& helps Ss to practice. - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Checks S’s practicing in individual.  Model sentences:
- introduces the model sentence. a round face - an oval face
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. full lips - thin lips
long hair - short hair
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M.
4. Word square.
- Introduces the wordsquare & divides the - Finding out the 17 hidden words in the
class into two groups & asks them to find out square.
the 17 hidden words in the square. - Giving the words.
- Asks Ss to give the words. H A I R X P
- Corrects & comments. N E F A T I
* Answer key: E O Y F E N
hair; fat; see; the; mouth; out; heavy. A B S E E G
ear; arm; near; toe; to; feet; R T H E T E
teeth; fingers. M O U T H R
nose; eye. H E A V Y S
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary.
- Exercise: B1 & 2- P85. Workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on P101.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................

******************************************************************************* 127
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
.................................................................................................................................................

WEEK: 20
Preparing's day: 5/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 9: the body
Lesson 4: faces(b2-3)
Period: 58
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in adjectives of color to describe features. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to describe their features.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision Jumbled words.
- Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the
correct words.
Yees = eyes; hari = hair; cefa = face;
Spli = lips dreshouls = shoulders. sone = nose
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
III. New lesson :
3. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: ROR. B2.P101.
black; gray; red; blue;
brown; white; yellow; green
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the
the mistakes. pronunciation.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the - Copying the words.
meaning & the pronunciation.

******************************************************************************* 128
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Finding friends:
- Introduces the requirements & the table then - Making sentences:
asks Ss to make sentences:  She has brown hair.
 She has brown hair.  She has green eyes. Etc…
 She has green eyes. Etc… - Going to the board & taking note their
- Asks Ss to go to the board & take note their friends appearances.
friends appearances & Comments .
She/ has… eyes hair lips teeth
black
gray
blue
White
Brown
red
green.
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
3. Dialogue build: B3 – 101.
- Read the dialogue & presents the symbols for - Repeating the dialogue to remember.
the words & asks Ss to repeat to remember the - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in
dialogue. pairs.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & - Building the dialogue.
in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation & building
- Asks Ss to build the dialogue. the dialogue.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. * Dialogue:
Hoa: I have a new doll.
Mai: What color is her hair ?
Hoa: It’s black.
Mai: What color are her eyes ?
Hoa: They are brown.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M.
2. Picture drill: B3/ P 101.
- Introduces the example exchange & the - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
pictures then helps Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. * Example exchange:
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in S1: What color is her hair ?

******************************************************************************* 129
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
groups & in pairs . S2: It’s black.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S1: What color are her eyes ?
* Note: Using pictures of the four dolls on page S2: They are brown.
101.



IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the model sentences.
- Prepare the pictures on P 100 & 101 for B1 – 4 – 5 - 6.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
Preparing's day: 6/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 9: the body
Lesson 5: faces(4-6)
Period: 59
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to further practice in body vocabulary to describe people. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to use body vocabulary to describe people.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.
1. Vocabulary: ROR.
round – a round face;
oval – an oval face

******************************************************************************* 130
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
full/ thin – full/ thin lips;
long/ short – long/ short hair.
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in
meaning, using the situation. individual.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times - Correcting the mistakes.
). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying the words.
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Prediction: B4 – P 101.
- Introduces the close text & asks Ss to
work in pairs to predict the information - Working in pairs to predict the
to fill in the gap. information & filling in the gap.
- Asks Ss to give their information. - Giving the information.
- Comments the information. - Commenting the information.
* Answer key:
* Miss Chi is tall and thin. She has a round
face, long black hair, brown eyes, a small * Miss Chi is ___ and thin. She has a ___
nose, thin lips and small white teeth. face, ___ ___ hair, ___ eyes, a ___ nose, ___
lips and small ___ teeth.
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M
3. Presentation text: B4 - P101.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts -Reading the texts about Miss. Chi &
about Miss. Chi & correct their correcting their prediction.
prediction. - Comparing their information.
- Asks Ss to compare their information.
- Corrects comments.
4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P76. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to questions.
work in pairs to ask & answer the - Correcting the answer keys &
- Helps Ss to correct & comments. Commenting.
* Questions: * Answer keys:
a. Is Miss. Chi’s hair long or short ? A. Chi’s hair is long.
b. What color are her eyes ? B. Her eyes are brown.
c. Are her lips full or thin ? C. They are full.
d. What color is her hair ? D. Her hair is black.
e. Is her nose big or small ? E. Her nose is small.

******************************************************************************* 131
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
5. Survey:
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to - Working in pairs to asks & answer
work in pairs to asks & answer something something about themselves & take note into
about themselves & take note into the table. the table.
- Asks Ss to give their information & - Giving their information.
comments.
My partner My Mum My Dad My Brother My Sister
Body Thin
Face Round
Hair Short - black
Eyes Etc…
Nose
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M)
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts.
- Exercise: write a short paragraph to describe people using the survey.
- Prepare the pictures on page 104 & 106.
VI.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 6/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 10: staying healthy
Lesson 1: how do you feel? (a1,2,5)
Period: 60
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in talking about how we feel using adjectives of Physical
state. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how we feel.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.

******************************************************************************* 132
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision ( 5 M ) : Picture cues.
- Asks Ss to work in pairs, take it in turn to point at the different picture on page
104-105 & ask and answer. Using the exchange: S1: What’s this color ?
S2: It’s green.
- Corrects & comments.

III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M.
1.Vocabulary:
hungry (adj); thirsty (adj);
full (adj); tired (adj);
hot (adj); cold (adj);
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
the mistakes. -Copying the words.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching:
- Presents the words & the meaning into two - Working in individual to match.
column then asks Ss to work in individual to hungry (adj); l ạnh
match the word to its meaning. thirsty (adj); nóng
- Corrects & comments. full (adj); đói
tired (adj); khát
hot (adj); mệt
cold (adj); no
II.PRACTICE Time: 20 M.
3. Word cue drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps * Example exchange:
Ss to practice. S1: How do you feel ?
- Reads the first modal for example & asks S2: I’m [ hungry].
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.

******************************************************************************* 133
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. HUNGRY THIRSTY HOT
COLD TIRED FULL
4. Picture drill: A1-P104 + A5-P106
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice. * Example exchange:
- Reads the first model for example & asks S1: How does he/she feel ?
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. S2: He/she is [ hungry].
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S1: How do they feel ?
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing S2: They are [ hungry].
in groups & in pairs . - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
5. Matching:
- Introduces the requirements & asks Ss to - Listening to the tape & matching the right
listen to the tape & match the right name name with the pictures on page 106.
with the pictures on page 106. - Comparing & giving their matching.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their matching.
- Helps SS to correct & comments.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 5 M
4. Guessing game:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Writing their physical state on a piece of
write their physical state on a piece of paper paper then ask the other to guess.
then ask the other to guess. - Playing the game.
- Helps Ss to play the game. * Example exchange:
-Corrects & comments. S1: Are you thirsty ?
S2: No, I’m not.
S1: Are you hot ?…
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to give the way to ask & answer about their physical state.
S1: How do you feel ?
S2: I’m [ hungry].
S1: How does he/she feel ?
S2: He/she is [ hungry].
S1: How do they feel ?
S2: They are [ hungry].
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
******************************************************************************* 134
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-P87. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 105 & what you like to eat or drink.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................




WEEK: 21
Preparing's day: 8/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 10: staying healthy
Lesson 2: how do you feel? (a3-4)
Period: 61
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to read a dialogue to recognize polite offers & requests with “What
would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to
recognize the polite offers & requests.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-READING Time: 15 M.
1. Vocabulary:
Some Orange Juice = A Drink (N);
Some Noodle (N); (To) Like .
******************************************************************************* 135
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
(To) Want = Would Like;
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating The Words In Chorus & In
meaning, using the situation. Individual.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). - Correcting The Mistakes.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving The Meaning & The Pronunciation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying The Words.
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Predict Dialogue:
- Introduces the open dialogue & asks Ss to - Working In Pairs To Predict The Suitable
work in pairs to predict the suitable words to Words To Fill In The Gaps To Complete The
fill in the gaps to complete the dialogue. Dialogue.
- Asks Ss to give their prediction. - Giving Their Prediction.
- Comments their prediction. * Open Dialogue:
Nam: How Do You Feel ?
Lan: I’m ………And………
Nam: What would you like ?
Lan: I’d like some……… What about you ?
Nam: I’m…… I’d like some………
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M
3. Presentation dialogue. A3-P105.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the dialogue - Reading the dialogue.
between Nam & Lan & get the details. - Checking their prediction.
- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects comments.
4. Matching:
- Introduces the poster & asks Ss to read the - Working in pairs to read the dialogue again
dialogue again & match the key words to the & matching the key words to the people.
people. - Comparing & giving the keys.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
Hot Lan Nam Ba
Tired hot
Thirsty
Full
Hungry
Noodles
A drink
******************************************************************************* 136
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
To sit down
III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
5. Mapped dialogue:
- Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to read - Reading the dialogue to remember.
to remember. - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups - Completing the dialogue.
& in pairs.
- Asks Ss to complete the dialogue.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
* Example exchange:
…fell ? S1: How do you fell ?
S2: I’m cold and hungry.
…cold + hungry S1: What would you like ?
…like ?
S2: I’d like some noodles. How do you fell ?
…some noodles…fell ? S!: I’m thirsty.
…thirsty
S2: What would you like ?
…like ? S1: I’d like some orange juice.
… orange juice.

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & give the form of the polite
offers & requests with “What would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”.
V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the dialogue.
- Exercise: 2-P87- workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 110 & the menu.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................


Preparing's day: 12/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 10: staying healthy
Lesson 3: food and drink (B1-3)
Period: 62
A.Objectives:

******************************************************************************* 137
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Helps Ss to practice in Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative &
Yes / No questions to talk about food & drink . By the end of this lesson, Ss will be
able to use these grammars to talk about food & drink correctly.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
Some / Any with There is / There are,
Positive, Negative & Yes / No questions
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision Networks.
- Introduces the requirement & asks
Ss to give the food & drink that food Drink
they usually have.
- Comments. rice meat Milk a drink

III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
an apple (n); an orange (n);
a banana (n); some water (n).
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
the mistakes. -Copying the words.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Dictation list:
- Presents the words & the table then asks Ss - Working in individual to list.
to listen & put the words into the correct A AN SOME
column. Banana An apple Rice
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their list. Hot drink An orange Water
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments. Cold drink Milk

******************************************************************************* 138
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
* Teacher reads: Vegetables
An apple; An orange Rice; Water Milk Meat;
Vegetables Meat; Noodle; Bread Banana Noodle
Hot drink; Cold drink
3. Presentation dialogue: B2-P109
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Listening & Practicing the dialogue
dialogue & introduces the model sentence. -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups * Model sentences:
& in pairs. (+) There is some rice
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. (?) Is there any rice ?
(-) There isn’t any rice.
(+) There are some rice
(?) Are there any rice ?
(-) There aren’t any rice.
4. Comprehension:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Ticking what for lunch on the list.
tick what for lunch on the list. - Comparing & giving the key.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the key. Meat  Fruit 
- Corrects & comments. Rice  Water 
noodles Milk
II.PRACTICE Time 15 M
5. Picture drill: B1-P108
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Example exchange:
Ss to practice. S1: Is there any… ?
- Reads the first modal for example & asks S2: Yes, there is some…
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. No, there isn’t any…
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S1: Are there any… ?
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing S2: Yes, there are some…
in groups & in pairs. No, there aren’t any…
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to give the way to use Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative &
Yes / No questions to talk about food & drink
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.

******************************************************************************* 139
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Exercise: 1-2-3 P91 &92. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 112 & what you like to eat or drink.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 15/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 10: staying healthy
Lesson 4: food and drink (B4-5)
Period: 63
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests
“I’d like some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?” . By the end of this lesson, Ss
will be able to use uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like
some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?” correctly.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense. “What would you like ?” - “I’d like some…”
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice
fruit/ milk/ vegetable
(a vegetable).
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
the mistakes. -Copying the words.
******************************************************************************* 140
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching / Grid:
- Presents the tape & the table then asks Ss - Working in individual to match.
to listen & match the names of the people
with what they would like. a b c d e f g h
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their Nhan x x
matching. Tuan x x
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments. Huong x x
Mai x x

2. Presentation dialogue: B4-P110.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Listening & Practicing the dialogue
dialogue & introduces the model sentence. -Correcting the pronunciation.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups * Model sentences:
& in pairs. - I’d like some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. fruit/ milk/ vegetable

II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
3. Picture drill: B4-P110 & B5-P111.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Example exchange:
Ss to practice. S1: What would you like ?
- Reads the first modal for example & asks S2: I’d like some [ fish ]
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing - Practicing in groups & in pairs.
in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 10 M
4. Chain game:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Talking about what they would like in turn.
talk about what they would like in turn. - Playing the game.
- Helps Ss to play the game. * Example:
-Corrects & comments. S1: I’d like some fish.
S2: I’d like some fish & some vegetable.
S3: I’d like some fish & some vegetables &
some orange juice.
S4:…

******************************************************************************* 141
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to give the uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like
some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?”.
V. Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P88. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 108 & what you like to eat or drink.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

WEEK: 22
Preparing's day: 20/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 10: staying healthy
Lesson 5: MY FAVORITE FOOD ( C 1-5).
Period: 64
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in speaking about favorite food & drink to contrast “Would
you like…?” & “Do you like…?”. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
their favorite food & drink.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense. “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”.

II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
my favorite food/ drink;
some carrots/ beans/
peas/ iced tea.
******************************************************************************* 142
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
the mistakes. -Copying the words.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Picture drill: B1-P108
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps * Example exchange:
Ss to practice. S1: What are these ?
- Reads the first modal for example & asks S2: They are beans. What are those?
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. S1: They are carrots.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing - Making sentences for the next cues.
in groups & in pairs. - Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Correcting the pronunciation.
3. ROR dialogue: C2-P112.
- Introduces the dialogue by giving the - Listening & Practicing the dialogue
symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen -Correcting the pronunciation.
to the dialogue.
- Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to * Model sentences:
remember. S1: Do you like vegetables ?
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
& in pairs. S1: Would you like some vegetables ?
- Introduces the model sentence. S2: Yes, I would. / Yes, please.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. No, I wouldn’t. / No, thank you

II.PRACTICE Time 15 M
4. Word cue drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Example exchange:
Ss to practice. S1: Do you like [ beans ] ?
- Reads the first modal for example & asks S2: Yes, I do. / [No, I don’t ].
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. S1: Would you like some [ beans ] now ?
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S2: No, thank you./ Yes, please.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
******************************************************************************* 143
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
beans peas carrots milk - Correcting the pronunciation.
iced tea oranges rice apple
III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M.
5. Survey:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Working in pairs to interview each other &
work in pairs to interview each other about taking note the information into the table.
their favorite food & drink using the given - Reporting the information about their
question & take note the information into the friends.
table.
- Asks Ss to report the information about * Question: Do you like chicken ?
their friends using the model. * Feedback: Nam likes chicken & orange but
- Corrects & comments. he doesn’t like fish…
Name Likes… Doesn’t like…
Nam Chicken & orange Fish

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to contrast “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 4-5 92. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 114 & what you like to eat or drink.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................


Preparing's day: 21/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 11: what do you eat?
Lesson 1: at the store (A1)
Period: 65
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to practice in quantifiers ( a kilo of…) & containers ( a bottle of…) to
talk about people buy at the store. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
quantifiers & containers.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense. Quantifiers & Containers.
******************************************************************************* 144
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
some eggs/ chocolates;
some oil/ beef/ soap/
toothpaste.
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
corrects the mistakes. -Copying the words.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching.
- Introduces the phrases & the pictures - Working in individual to match the
then asks Ss to work in individual to picture to the correct word .
match the picture to the correct word . grams of
- Asks Ss to compare their matching & a kilo of
match. a can of
- Corrects & comments. a bar of
a box of
a tube of
a packet of
a dozen
a bottle of

II.PRACTICE Time 25 M
3. ROR dialogue: A1a-P114.
- Introduces the dialogue by giving the - Listening & Practicing the dialogue
symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen -Correcting the pronunciation.
to the dialogue.
******************************************************************************* 145
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus * Model sentences:
to remember. S1: Can I help you ?
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please.
groups & in pairs. S1: Here you are.
- Introduces the model sentence. S2: Thank you.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.
4. Picture drill: A1b-P115.
- Introduces the example exchange & * Example exchange:
Helps Ss to practice. S1: Can I help you ?
- Reads the first modal for example & S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please.
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in S1: Here you are.
individual. S2: Thank you.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s - Making sentences for the next cues.
practicing in groups & in pairs. - Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & - Correcting the pronunciation.
comments.
- Reading the model & the substituted
words - Reading the substitution sentence.
5. Substitution drill: - Practicing in individual.
- Introduces the requirement & helps Ss - Correcting the pronunciation & the
to read the model then reads the substitution.
substituted words & asks Ss to read the
substitution sentence. * Ss repeat:
- Asks Ss to practice in individual. I’d like a bottle of water,
- Corrects the pronunciation & comments. please.
I’d like a bar of soap,
* Teacher reads:
water; oil; soap; peas; beans; coke; please.
chocolates; eggs; tea; noodles
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P.93. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 116 & Things on page 117.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
******************************************************************************* 146
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 1/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 11: what do you eat?
Lesson 2: at the store (A2)
Period: 66
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for
food shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail
about quantities for food shopping.
I.Knowledge:
-‘Can I help you ?’; (to) want…; (to) need….;
How much…? (uncountable noun; How many…? (countable noun)..
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
Dictation lists: with "How much........?" " How many........?"
T reads: oranges, meat, milk, bread, carrots, chocolates, beef, chicken, rice, eggs, apples,
soap.
Answer key:
How much....?: meat, milk, bread, beef, chicken, rice, soap.
How many....? :oranges, carrots, chocolates, eggs, apples
III. New lesson :
Teacher's works Students'works
I.Presentation.(10ms)
1.Presentation dialogue.
A2 P.116 -Ss read the dialogue and answer
From the dialogue, T sets a sence to give the the questions of the teacher.
model sentences.
1)I need/ want some beef.
How much do you need/ want? -Ss give the concept check.
2)I need/ want some eggs.
How many do you need/ want?
II.Practice.(20ms)
******************************************************************************* 147
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
"Blackboard drill"
T shows the way to ask ss practice well. -Ss read the key words and practice
well.
Shopping list
300g. beef
1k rice
500g. beans
6 apples
1 dozen eggs
2 bottles milk
3 packets noodles
Example exchanges:
S1:I need some beef.
S2:How much do you want? -Ss practice in pair.
S1:Three hundred grams, please.
.......etc.
-T controls and corrects.
III.Production (10ms) -Take notes.
"Role play"
T asks each ss writes a shopping list. In pair,
ss take it in turns to be the storekeeper and -Ss work in role to practice well.
the customer.
Storekeeper Customer
Can I help I want/ need....
you?
How much/ I'd like....
many.....?
Anything else? Do you have
any.......
That's....dong, .......please.
please. .......Thank you
! -Take notes.
-T corrects.

IV. Consolidation.(2m)
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
V.Homework.(2m)
-Doing exercise : A3 in the notebook.
-Preparing: Unit 11: B1, 3-4
******************************************************************************* 148
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

WEEK 23
Preparing's day: 1/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 11: what do you eat?
Lesson 3: at the store (A3-4)
Period: 67
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for
food shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail
about quantities for food shopping.
I.Knowledge:
-‘Can I help you ?’; (to) want…; (to) need….;
How much…? (uncountable noun; How many…? (countable noun)..
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :

TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M.
1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid)
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work - Working in pairs to predict which the
in pairs to predict which the statements is statements is true or false.
true or false. - Comparing & Giving the keys.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys Yes No
& Comments …big ? √
…small ? √
…a yard ? √
…a well ? √
…flowers ? √
******************************************************************************* 149
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
… trees ? √
II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 10 M:
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Listening to the dialogue & getting the
dialogue & get the details. details.
- Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check - Listening to the dialogue & checking the
the prediction & Corrects. prediction.
III.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.
3. Vocabulary: Slap the Board.
a garden (n);
a vegetable (n);
a photo (n).
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in
meaning, using the situation. individual.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying the words.
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
4.True / False statement prediction:
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work - Working in pairs to predict which the
in pairs to predict which the statements is statements is true or false.
true or false. - Comparing & Giving the keys.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys & * Statements:
Comments.. 1. The house is in the country.
* Answer keys: 2. There is a river near the house.
1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T; 3. There’re trees to the left of the house.
4. There’re two gardens.
IV.WHILE-READING Time: 10 M
5. Presentation text: A2-P73.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter & - Reading the letter & get the details.
get the details. - Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.
6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work - Working in pairs to match the questions to
in pairs to match the questions to the the answers.

******************************************************************************* 150
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
answers. - Giving the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the A. Yes, it is.
house ? B. No, it isn’t.
b. Is the house beautiful ? C. No, she isn’t.
c. Is there a flowers garden behind the D. Yes, there is..
house? E. No, there isn’t.
d. Is there a lake to the right of the house?  Answer:
e. Is Nga in the city ? a –D; b – A; c – E; d – E; e – C.


V.POST-LISTENING & READING
Time:5 M
7. Transformation writing:
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to - Writing in individual & giving the
work in individual to change the underlined information.
information to describe their own house & * My house:
then draw a picture of it as a photo . There’s a flowers garden in front of the
- Asks Ss to give their information & house. There’s a vegetable garden behind the
comments. house. To the left of the house, there’s a lake.
To the right of the house, there are tall trees.
Here is a photo.
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare the picture on page 74.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 3/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 11: what do you eat?
Lesson 4: at the canteen (b1,3,4)
Period: 68
A.Objectives:
******************************************************************************* 151
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Helps students will be able to practice in Offers and Requests for Food
and Drink.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense. “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
Teacher's activities Students'activities
I.Practice.
1.Kim's game.(10m)
B1 P.119.
T asks Ss play it in team to taking it -Ss enjoy the game.
in turns to fill up the lists on the -Ss play it in team
board. to taking it in
- Asks Ss to give their information & turns to fill up the
comments. lists on the board.
There's a.. There's There are - Working in pairs
some.... some.... to match the
-can of soda -rice - vegetables questions to the
.... -milk -apples answers.
...........etc .....etc. ........etc. - Giving the answer
-T corrects. keys.
2.Matching.(10M) - Correcting the
B4 P.120. T shows the way to ask ss answer keys
to play. &Commenting
- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.
a b c d e f g h i j k l
2 4 1 5 7 3 6 8
-T corrects.
3.Word cue drill.(10m)
T shows the way to ask ss to practice
well.
- Asks Ss to give their information & - Working in pairs
comments. to match the
bread/ milk fish/ soda questions to the
******************************************************************************* 152
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
noodles/ chicken/ answers.
water iced tea - Giving the answer
rice/ beef/ keys.
orange vegetables/ - Correcting the
juice lemonade answer keys
Example exchanges: B2 P.120 &Commenting
S1:What would you like for breakfast?
S2:I'd like some bread and some milk.
............etc.
T controls and corrects.
II.Production.(10m) - Working in pairs
- Asks Ss to give their information & to match the
comments. questions to the
1.Chain game answers.
S1: I'd like some fish. - Giving the answer
S2: I'd like some fish and some rice. keys.
S3: I'd like some fish and some rice - Correcting the
and a coke. answer keys
S4:......etc. &Commenting
-Ss read the word
cues and practice
well.




-Ss work in groups.
- Working in groups
to match the
questions to the
answers.
- Giving the answer
keys.
- Correcting the
answer keys
&Commenting




******************************************************************************* 153
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************


IV. Consolidation.(2m)
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
V.Homework (2m).
-Doing exercise : B1-2 in the workbook.
-Preparing: Unit 11: B5,6
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 4/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 10: what do you eat?
Lesson 5: at the canteen (b4-5)
Period: 69
A.Objectives:

- Helps students will be able to talking about price for Food and Drink
with " How much/ many................?"
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense. “How much/many...........?
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
Teacher's activities Students'activities
I.Presentaetion.(10ms)
1.Pre-teach.
T elicits to teach vocab. -Guess the words- listen
-Fifty =50 and repeat.
-a hundred ( two hundred....) - Giving the answer keys.
=100 ( 200) - Correcting the answer
-a thousand ( two thousand....) keys &Commenting
******************************************************************************* 154
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
= 1.000 ( 2.000)
-Seven thousand five hundred =
7.5000.
2.Checking vocab.
-Slap the board. -Ss enjoy the game.

100 200
5.000

250 6.200
-Listen- understand and
II.Practice.(25m) practice well.
1.Blackboard drill. - Working in pairs to
T shows the way to practice. match the questions to the
100 50 200 answers.
150 350 750 - Giving the answer keys.
1.000 2.000 5.000 - Correcting the answer
4.200 keys &Commenting
7.500 9.500 2.300
10.000 - Working in pairs to
match the questions to the
2.Noughts and crosses. answers.
2.500 500 3.000 - Giving the answer keys.
dong dong dong - Correcting the answer
4.800 10.000 1.000 keys &Commenting
dong dong dong
1.200 8.500 5.000
dong dong dong
Example exchange:
S1: How much is it?
S2: It's two thousand five
hundred dong.
*Pre-teach.P. 121
-a cake ( n) picture
-a sandwich : (n) picture
-a fried rice (n) axplaination - Listening to the words.
-an iced cream (n) explaination. - Repeating the words in
-a bowl of (n) picture. chorus & in individual.
- Introduces the words by - Correcting the mistakes.
explaining the meaning, using - Giving the meaning & the

******************************************************************************* 155
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
the situation. pronunciation.
- Reads the words for the modal -Copying the words.
(3 times ). Then helps SS to
repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in
individual & corrects the
mistakes. -Look at the picture and
- Writes the words on the Bb & practice well.
checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the -Ss fill the survey
words. according to Real price
*Picture drill. B5-6 P.121 they know, not the price
Ex: S1: How much is a fried in the texbook.
rice?
S2: It's two thousand
five hundred dong.
........etc.
III.Production." survey"(5m)
T asks ss to fill the survey
according to Real price they
know, not the price in the
texbook.
How a a an a a Tieng Anh
muc fri bow er rul sch 6
h ed l as er ool
is ric of er bag
it e
?
... ... .. ... ... 11.200
.. . . dong
-T controls and corrects.
IV. Consolidation.(2m)
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
V.Homework.(2m)
-Doing exercise : B3-4 in the workbook.
-Preparing: Unit 11:Grammar practice
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
******************************************************************************* 156
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
.................................................................................................................................................

THE END




WEEK: 24
Preparing's day: 5/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Grammar practice
Period: 70
A.Objectives:

- Helps students will be able to further practice in Likes and Dislikes ,
Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies.

I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :

Teacher's activities Students'activities
I.Likes and Dislikes.(20ms)
1.Find someone who.
T shows the way to ask ss to practice. -Listen and practice. - Working

******************************************************************************* 157
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Gives the content of the exercise & helps in pairs to match the
Ss to complete. questions to the answers.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys & - Giving the answer keys.
explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Correcting the answer
- Corrects & comments. keys &Commenting

Find someone who..... Name Epected:
....likes fish Lan S1: Do you like fish?
....doesn't like chicken ... S2: yes, I do.
....likes bread .... S1: What your name?
....doesn't like rice .... S2: My name's Lan.
....likes milk ... ....etc.
....doesn't like soda ...
...Doaesn't like ...
vegetables.
2.Write it up. -Ss work individually- share with
Grammar practice 2 P.122 with "a" "an" your partner.
"some" - Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer
- Gives the content of the exercise & helps
keys &Commenting
Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
a: a sandwich, a banana...
an: an orange, an ice cream....
some: some noodles, some fish....
-T corrects.
3.Guessing game. -1 or 2 ss go to the boad then play
- Gives the content of the exercise & helps the game.
Ss to complete. - Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
keys &Commenting
explains the reason how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Example:
I'd like some milk.
S1: Would you like a sandwich?
S2: No, I wouldn't.
S1: Would you like some milk?
S2: yes, I would.
******************************************************************************* 158
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
........etc.
II Adjectives.(20ms)
1.Grammar practice 3 P.123. - Working in pairs to
"Pelmanism" match the questions to
- Gives the content of the exercise & helps the answers.
Ss to complete. - Giving the answer keys.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys & - Correcting the answer
explains the reason how to choose the keys. keys &Commenting
- Corrects & comments.
T shows the way to practice.
tall long hot fat heavy weak
short short cold thin lihgt strong
2.Question words.
Grammar pracrice 4 P.123
- Gives the content of the exercise & helps
Ss to complete. -Ss play in groups ( 2 groups)
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
3.Present simple $ present progressive.
Grammar practice 5 P.123.
- Gives the content of the exercise & helps
Ss to complete. -Do the exercises.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
4.Quantifiers.
"lucky number"
1.What does cooking oil come in?
2.What does tea come in?
3.L
4.What does soap come in?
5 What does soda come in? -Ss enjoy the game.
6.L
7. What does iced tea come in?
8.What do noodles come in?
-T corrects.



******************************************************************************* 159
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************


-Take notes.
IV. Consolidation.(2m)
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
V.Homework.(2m)
-Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book.
-Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

THE END

Preparing's day: 6/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Written test
Period: 71
A.Objectives:
- Helps students will be able students will be able to consolidate the
knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11.

I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :

Full name : …………................………………
Class :6...........
I. Choose the best answers (4ms)
******************************************************************************* 160
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

1. Is her hair short ?
-No,it isn’t . It’s ……………….
A,short B,long C,black D,yellow 1...........................
2. Is your mother thin or fat ?
- She is …………………..
A, light B,thin C,tall D,heavy 2...........................
3. Thanh has …………………
A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval D,round face 3............................
4. What color are her eyes ?
-They’re ………………….
A,long B,round C,black D,small 4...........................
5. I have………………..hair.
A,long black B,a long black C,black long D,a black long 5...........................
6. ………….does he feel ?
A,How B,What C, How much D, How many 6...........................
7. ………………you like noodles?
A,What B,Are C,Would D,Which 7............................
8. I’m ……………..I’d like some fish and rice
A, cold B, hot C, hungry D, thirsty 8...........................
9. What would you like …………dinner?
A,in B,on C,at D,for 9...........................
10. There aren’t …………….apples on the table
A,any B,some C,a D,an 10..........................
11. Can I …………… you?
A,have B,help C,has D,do
11.........................
12. How ……………..milk do you want?
A,many B,much C,some D,any 12.........................
13. I’d like …………….bananas,please.
A,any B,some C,an D,a 13.........................
14. How many oranges do you want?
A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen D,A kilos 14.........................

15.Can I help you ?
-……………..of cooking oil,please.
A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle 15..........................
16. A fried rice ……………….2,500d
A, is B,are C, do D ,does 16..........................

******************************************************************************* 161
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II. Put a/an/some/any (1m)

1. There is ……….. bar of soap. 1: ......................
2. I’d like ………….apple. 2: .......................
3. Is there ……….. milk ? 3: ......................
4. There are ………..bananas 4:.......................

III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)

green head toe chicken Face
black finger egg red

1. Color :…………………………………………
2. Body : toe, …………………………………..
3. Food :…………………………………………..

IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket (1,5 ms)

1. He ……………………..( ride ) his bike everyday.
2. Lan ……………………….( watch ) television now
3. You can ……………………..(park ) here
4. My father................................(walk-not) to school everyday, he ..........................(go)
to school by motorbike.
5. They...........................(wait) for a bus at the moment.

V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms)

1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ?
1…………………………………………………………………

2. How / beef/ he / want ?
2…………………………………………………………………...

3. How/ oranges/ she / want?
3.......................................................................................................

THE END

Preparing's day: 7/2/2010

******************************************************************************* 162
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Teaching's day: 6G:
Tr¶ bµi kiÓm tra 1 tiÕt
Period: 72
A.Objectives:
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.

I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :

Teacher's activities Students'activities
I.Choose the best answers (4ms) /Time: 10m - Gives the content of the
1.Is her hair short ? exercise & helps Ss to
-No,it isn’t . It’s ………………. complete.
A,short B,long C,black - Asks Ss to give the answer
D,yellow keys & explains the reason
2. Is your mother thin or fat ? how to choose the keys.
- She is ………………….. - Corrects & comments.
A, light B,thin C,tall
D,heavy Key:
3. Thanh has ………………… 1.B
A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval 2.B
D,round face 3............................ 3.B
4. What color are her eyes ? 4.C
-They’re …………………. 5.A
A,long B,round C,black 6.A
D,small 7.C
5. I have………………..hair. 8.C
A,long black B,a long black C,black long D,a 9.D
black long 10.A
6. ………….does he feel ? 11.B
******************************************************************************* 163
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
A,How B,What C, How much D, 12.B
How many 13.B
7. ………………you like noodles? 14.B
A,What B,Are C,Would 15.D
D,Which 16.A
8. I’m ……………..I’d like some fish and rice
A, cold B, hot C, hungry
D, thirsty
9. What would you like …………dinner?
A,in B,on C,at
D,for
10. There aren’t …………….apples on the table
A,any B,some C,a
D,an
11. Can I …………… you?
A,have B,help C,has
D,do
12. How ……………..milk do you want?
A,many B,much C,some
D,any 12.........................
13. I’d like …………….bananas,please.
A,any B,some C,an
D,a
14.How many oranges do you want?
A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen
D,A kilos
15.Can I help you ?
-……………..of cooking oil,please.
A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle
16. A fried rice ……………….2,500d
A, is B,are C, do D ,does
16..........................
- Gives the content of the
II. Put a/an/some/any (1m) /Time: 5m exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
1.There is ……….. bar of soap. 1: ...................... - Asks Ss to give the answer
2.I’d like ………….apple. 2: ....................... keys & explains the reason
3.Is there ……….. milk ? 3: ...................... how to choose the keys.
4.There are ………..bananas 4:....................... - Corrects & comments.
KEY:
******************************************************************************* 164
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
1.A 2.AN 3.ANY
4.SOME
III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)/ Time: 5m - Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
green head toe chicken Face complete.
black finger egg red - Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
1.Color :………………………………………… how to choose the keys.
2.Body : toe, ………………………………….. - Corrects & comments.
3.Food :………………………………………….. Key:
1.Color: green, black,red
2.Body: toe,head,face,finger
3.food:chicken,

IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket - Gives the content of the
(1,5 ms) /Time: 10m exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
1. He ……………………..( ride ) his bike everyday. - Asks Ss to give the answer
2. Lan ……………………….( watch ) television now keys & explains the reason
3. You can ……………………..(park ) here how to choose the keys.
4. My father................................(walk-not) to school - Corrects & comments.
everyday, he ..........................(go) to school by motorbike. Key:
5. They...........................(wait) for a bus at the moment. 1.rides 2.is watching 3.park
4.doesn’t walk /goes
5.are waiting
V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms) /Time: 10m
Key:
1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ? 1.What would she like for
dinner?
2. How / beef/ he / want ? 2.How much beef does he
want?
3. How/ oranges/ she / want? 3.How many oranges does
she want?
IV. Consolidation.(2m)
-T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this lesson.
V.Homework.(2m)
-Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book.
-Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2
C.Can improved:
******************************************************************************* 165
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

THE END




WEEK: 25
Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 12: sports and pastimes
Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)
Period: 73
A.Objectives:
Helps Ss to practice in Present Progressive & sport vocabulary. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what people are doing now.
I.Knowledge:
-Present progressive.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
Jumbled words.
- Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to
form the correct words.
Torps = sport; bolfatol = football; belvalylol = volleyball;
Mage = game; sucim = music; lietoseniv = television
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
III. New lesson :
******************************************************************************* 166
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
(to) swim; (to) play badminton;
(to) jog; (to) do aerobics;
(to) skip; (to) play table tennis;.
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
the mistakes. -Copying the words.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Dictation list:
- Presents the words & the table then asks Ss - Working in individual to list.
to listen & put the words into the correct 2 people 1 person
column.
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their list.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
* Teacher reads:
play football; jog; do aerobics; play tennis;
play table tennis; play volleyball.
3. Presentation dialogue: A1-P124.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Listening & Practicing the dialogue
dialogue & introduces the example -Correcting the pronunciation.
exchange.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups *Example exchange:
& in pairs. S1: What are they doing?
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S2: They’re playing soccer.
S1: What is She / he doing ?
S2: She / he skipping.
II.PRACTICE Time 10 M
4. Picture drill: A1-P124.
- Introduces the example exchange & - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
Helps Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks - Practicing in groups & in pairs.
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation.

******************************************************************************* 167
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing *Example exchange:
in groups & in pairs. S1: What are they doing?
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S2: They’re playing soccer.
S1: What is She / he doing ?
S2: She / he skipping.
III.Further practice Time: 10 M
5. Noughts & Crosses:
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in - Working in groups to choose the cue &
groups to choose the picture & make the make the question & the answer.
question & the answer.
- Corrects & comments. *Example exchange:
S1: Picture C.
S1: What are they doing?
S2: They’re playing soccer.
Picture C Picture A Picture B
Picture F Picture D Picture E
Picture H Picture G Picture I

IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
V.Homework(Time: 2M):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P.103. Workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 125 .
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 17/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 12: sports and pastimes
Lesson 2: What are you doing? (a3-5)
Period: 74
A.Objectives:



******************************************************************************* 168
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
- Helps Ss to read a short text about sport, & practicing “WHICH“ questions
with simple present tense. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
people regular exercise.

I.Knowledge
“WHICH” questions with simple present tense.:
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
Slap the board.
- Introduces the words & helps Ss to practice in two groups.
Môn bóng bàn môn cầu lông đi bộ thể dục bóng đá
Môn bóng chuyền nhảy dây bơi môn quần vợt
- Comments the game.

III. New lesson :


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-READING Time: 5 M.
1. Open predict:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Working in pairs to predict what sport Lan
work in pairs to predict what sport Lan & & Nam like (3 each ).
Nam like (3 each ). - Giving Their Prediction.
- Asks Ss to give their prediction. Lan Nam
- Comments their prediction. 1. 1.
2. 2.
3. 3.
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M

2. Presentation text. A4-P126. - Reading the text.
- Checking their prediction.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text
about Nam & Lan & get the details.
- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects comments. - Working in pairs to answer the questions.
******************************************************************************* 169
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

3. Comprehension questions: - Giving the answers & correcting.
* Questions:
- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to a. Which sport does Lan play ?
work in pairs to answer the questions. b. Does Lan play tennis ?
- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. c. Which sport does Nam play ?
d. Does Nam play table tennis ?
* Answers:
a. Lan swim, does aerobics & play
badminton.
b. No, she doesn’t.
c. Nam plays soccer, table tennis, & jogs.
d, Yes, he does.
III.POST- READING Time: 15 M
4. Picture drill: A3-P125. - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps - Making sentences for the next cues.
Ss to practice. - Practicing in groups with teacher & in
- Reads the first model for example & asks closed pairs .
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.

- Practices with Ss in the whole class & * Example exchange:
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . S1: Which sport do you do ?
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S2: I [ play soccer ] & [ swim ].
5. Survey:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Working in pairs to ask each other about the
work in pairs to ask each other about the sport they do & filling the information into
sports they do & fill the information into the the table.
table. - Comparing& reporting the information.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the * Example exchange:
information. S1: Which sport do you do ?
- Comments S’s information. S2: I swim.
S1: What else ?
S2: I play volleyball.
S1: Do you play table tennis ?
S2: Yes, I do.
Name Sport
Hoa Swim volleyball Table tennis


******************************************************************************* 170
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************


IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson
V.Homework Time: 2m:
- Study the vocabulary & exchange.
- Exercise: 3-4-P104- workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 127& what you do in your free times.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................

Preparing's day: 18/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 12: sports and pastimes
Lesson 3: free time (b1-3)
Period: 75
A.Objectives:
- Helps Ss to write a short text about what they do in their free time. By the end
of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a short text about what they do in their free
time.
I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
Guessing game.

I……..in my free time * Example:
- Introduces the words & helps Ss to S1: Do you play ….in your free time ?
practice in two groups. S2: No, I don’t.
- Comments the game. S1: Do you watch TV ?
S2: No, I don’t
III. New lesson :
******************************************************************************* 171
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-WRITING Time: 20 M.
1.Vocabulary:
free time;
(to) go fishing;
(to) go to the movie.
- Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words.
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. - Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. Correcting the mistakes.
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying the words.
corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Picture drill: B1-P127.
- Introduces the example exchange & - Repeating in chorus & in individual.
Helps Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks - Practicing in groups & in pairs.
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing *Example exchange:
in groups & in pairs. S1: What does Phuong do in his free time?
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S2: He goes to the movie.
3. Transformation writing - B1-P127.
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Working in pairs to change “ I “ to the
work in pairs to change “ I “ to the name of name of people in the pictures.
people in the pictures. - Comparing & giving their writing.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their writing. * Answer :
- Corrects & comments. a. Phuong goes to the movie.
b. Ly watches TV
c. Nam reads
d. Lan listens to music.
e. Tuan goes fishing.
f. Long play video games.
II.WHILE-WRITING
Time: 15 M
4. Pyramid: - Working in individual to write 3 things
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to about what they do in their free time &
work in individual to write 3 things about putting all the sentences together on a poster.
what they do in their free time & put all their - Reporting the information.
******************************************************************************* 172
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
sentences together on a poster.
- Asks Ss to report their information.
- Comments. * Groups writing (poster).
* Example:
+ Individual writing: San, Thuy & Chinh watch Tv
( San writes ) I watch TV, I go fishing & I San & Chinh play football
play football. San goes fishing
( Thuy writes ) I watch TV, I go to the park Thuy goes to the part & ply badminton
& I play badminton. Chinh listens to music
( Chinh writes ) I listen to music, I play
football & I watch TV.

IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M )
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & exchange.
- Exercise: 1-2-P104-105 workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 128 & 129.
C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................




******************************************************************************* 173
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************




Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 12: sports and pastimes
Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)
Period: 72
A.Objectives:
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.

I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :

C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................


Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 12: sports and pastimes
Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)
Period: 72
A.Objectives:
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.

******************************************************************************* 174
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :

C.Can improved:
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................


Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
Unit 12: sports and pastimes
Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)
Period: 72
A.Objectives:
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.

I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :

C.Can improved:
******************************************************************************* 175
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................




Date: 9/3/2007
Period 80
Unit13 activities and the seasons
Lesson 2: A2-3 (*P. 135)
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about your favourite weather and
contrast it with ‘‘What is the weather like?‘‘
I.Knowledges : What weather do you like?
What is the weather like?
II. Skill: Speaking
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, .
B. Procedures :
I. Settlement
Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking :
Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues :
Can tho / hot
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Revision :
Wordsquare
_ Asks Ss to find out vocab from wordsquare Ss work in individually to
F find out vocab from
A wordsquare
L
L
C
O Listen to the tape to correct

******************************************************************************* 176
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
L their precdictions
D -

X
W
A
R
M
N Ss listen and then practice in
S pairs
S Ss copy down on their
notebook
G
N
I Work in pairs to practice
R following example exchange:
P S1:What weather do you/
S they like?
U S2 : I / Theylike [hot]
E weather

O
N
L Work in pairs to make the
N dia
I Example:
O S1: What is the weather like
M in Ha noi?
A S2: It’s cold
S1: What is the weather like
T in Can tho?
H S2: It’s hot
S S1: What weather do you
I like?
T S2 : I like cold weather
S S1: come to Ha noi
M S2: What weather do you
S like?
S2 : I like hot weather
******************************************************************************* 177
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
C S1: Come to Can tho
O
O
L
K
E
E
O

W
E
A
T
H
E
R
N


Answer keys
: Spring
: go, got, me, sea,on,summer,season
: fall,cold,warm,cool,weather
2 Presentation:A3 P 135
-T reads the text ,then asks Ss to practice
Model sentences :
What weather do you like?
I like hot weather
What is the weather like today ?
It’s cold
3. Practice : Picture drill/ Word cue drill
A3 P135
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example
exchange:
S1 : What weather do you/ they like?
S2 : I /Theylike [hot] weather
a.She /like/ hotweather
b. I /like /cool
c. Huy/like/ warm

******************************************************************************* 178
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
4. Further practice :
Mapped dialogue:
-Asks Ss to make the dia

Can tho Ha noi
....Hanoi? ...cold
. .. Can tho ?
...hot ...like?
...cold . ...hanoi?
...like? ...hot...
....can tho



IV. Consolidation:
 Asks Ss to write the model sentences.
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 3
 Do ex 2,3 P 108 (work book)



Date: 9/3/2007

Period 81
Unit13 activities and the seasons
Lesson 3: A4-5 (P. 136)
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to use ‘‘when ‘‘ clauses in positive
statements and ‘‘Wh‘‘ questions
I.Knowledges : What questions
II. Skill: Speaking
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, .
B. Procedures :
I. Settlement
Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking :
******************************************************************************* 179
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues :
She/like/ hot
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1 Presentation:
Networks go for a walk listen to music
read a book watch TV fly kites Ss work in individually to
write vocab
play soccer Pastimes go swimming - go joging , go fishing , play
badmimton
Predict - do aerobics, go camping
-Asks Ss to predict what Ba does when it’s hot/ cold/
cool/warm Work in groups to predict
Answer keys : what Ba does when it’s hot/
a. when it’s hot He goes camping. cold/ cool/warm
b. when it’s cold he plays soccer
c. when it’s cool he goes jogging
d. when it’s warm he goes fishing
Presentation Text : A4 P136 Listen to the text, then read
-T reads the text ,then asks Ss to read and check to correct their precdictions
their predictions . -
Model sentences : Copy down the model
what does Ba do when it’s hot? sentences
Do you
He goes swimming .
I go

3. Practice : Word cue drill Work in pairs to practice
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example following example exchange:
exchange:
S1 : When it’s cold do you jog? S1 : When it’s cold do you
S2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t jog?
a.cold / go jogging ? S2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t
b. cool/ do aerobics?
c. hot / go swimming?
d. warm / go to the park?
4. Further practice :
Transformation writing: Work in pairs to change the

******************************************************************************* 180
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
-Asks Ss to change the text about Ba to write about text about Ba to write about
themselves ,using ‘I‘ following example : themselves ,using ‘I‘
when it’s hot I ...... following example :
when it’s cold .I.... when it’s hot I ......
when it’s cool.I..... when it’s cold .....
when it’s warm I...... when it’s cool......
- Then Asks Ss to swap their writing on the board , when it’s warm ......
read their‘s partner‘s text then write about their Then swap their writing on
partner,using He/She the board , read their‘s
partner’s text then write
about their partner,using
He/She following example :
when it’s hot She ......
when it’s cold he...
when it’s cool. she.....
when it’s warm he......


IV. Consolidation:
 Asks Ss to write the model sentences.
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 4
 Do ex 4 P. 111 (work book)




Date : 12 /3/2007
Period 82
Unit13 activities and the seasons
Lesson 4: B1 (*P. 138-9)
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in advs of frequency,

******************************************************************************* 181
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Simple present , sports vocabulary,season
I, Knowledges: sports, seasons vocabulary
advs of frequency
II,Skills: Speaking
III,Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. Check the form
What do you do whene it's hot?
III,New lesson:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
-1 Matching :
-Asks SS to match Work in individually to
match



x
Listen and repeat in
never choral, in groups, in
always individually
often Then copy down on their
usually notebooks
sometimes

2 Presentation:
*Pre -teach:
(to) play basketball:
( to) go sailing: Work in groups to play
T uses the techniques to elicit each word this game
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check : What and Where

******************************************************************************* 182
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Listen and practice the
play basketball go sailing text


Work in individually to
cold hot warm weather make the
questions for the answers
Then share with their
Presentation : B1 P 138 parter in pairs
-Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text
2.Practice: Answer given:
Asks Ss to make questions for the answer
a. We often play volleyball?
b. They sometimes go sailing
c. I often go swimming
d. She usually plays badminton
e. We always play basketball
Answer given:
a.What do you do in the spring?
b. What do they do in the fall?
Work in groups to
c. What do you do in the summer ? answer the questions
d.What does do in the fall? Example :
e.What do you do in the winter? 1 It's cold
3 Production : 2
Lucky Numbers
-Asks Ss to play the game by answer the questions
1
2
3
4

10
11
12
******************************************************************************* 183
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
5

9
8
7
6

1 What is the weather like in winter ?
2 What do you usually do in the winter?
3 What do you usually eat in the winter?
4 LN
5 What is the weather like in the spring ?
6 LN
7 Where do you usually go in the summer ?
8 What weather do you like ?
9 What fruit do you like ?
10 LN
11 What is the weather like in the fall ?
12 What sports do you do in the winter?
IV Consolidation:
V, Homework:
10 Do ex 1,2 P 111-112
11 Prepare Lesson 5 B2




Date 12 /3/2007
Period 83
Unit13 activities and the seasons
Lesson 5: B2 (*P. 139)
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk write activities you do in different
season
I, Knowledges: temperature and seasons vocabulary
******************************************************************************* 184
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
What 's the weather like ?
II,Skills: Writing
III,Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. Check vocab
III,New lesson:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
-1 Pre-Writing:
*Brainstorm : watch TV
Work in groups to
Activities write vocab
summer and seasons winter


play in the park go swimming go jogging


hot winter
Board drill : B2 P. 139 Work in pairs to
-Asks Ss to practice the structure practice the structure
S1 : What do you do in the summer ? S1 : What do you do
S2 : I often play tennis in the summer ?
Survey : S2 : I often [ play
Asks SS to fill in the table by asking and answering follwing tennis ]
example:



Name
Season Work in pairs to ask
Weather and answer follwing
usuallygo example
usuallydo
usually

******************************************************************************* 185
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Practice the dialogue
Hoai
fall
cool
The
mountains
Go camping
A picnic hot drink

...

Work in groups to
write about the
friends following
example
Hoai likes the fall
whene the weather is
S1; Which season do you like ? cool.She usually goes
S2;: Fall camping
S1: What's the weather do you like in the fall
S2: It's cool
S1: Where do you usually do you go ?
S2: to the mountains
S1: What do you usually do there ?
S2: I go camping with my friends
S1: What do you usually eat or drink ?
S2 We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot drinks
Write it up:
- Asks SS to write about the friends following example
Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually
goes camping

IV Consolidation:
Check the vocab
V, Homework:
12 Do ex 4
- Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 1 A1-3 (P 140-141)


******************************************************************************* 186
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************




Date : 20 /3/2007
Period 84
Unit14 making plans
Lesson 1: A1 (*P. 140-141)
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk vacation plans
I, Knowledges: ''going to , positive statements and Wh 'questions
II,Skills: Speaking
III,Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. Check the form
What do you do when it's hot?
III,New lesson:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
-1 Presentation:
*Pre -teach:
the summer vacation ( translation) : kú nghØ hÌ Listen and repeat in choral, in
the citadel (picture): thµnh néi groups, in individually
(to) stay with ( someone): ë víi ai Then copy down on their
(to) stay for ( aweek/a day): ë bao nhiªu ngµy notebooks
my uncle (example): chó ,b¸c t«i
my aunt (example): c«, d× t«i
(to ) visit ( translation): th¨m
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and
repeat in chorus and then individually
******************************************************************************* 187
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and
stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check : Ordering vocabulary A 1 p 140 Work in individually to listen to
-T reads the text aloud the text to order vocab
Answer keys :
1 the summer vacation 4(to) stay for ( aweek/a
day
6 the citadel 6 my uncle
3 (to) stay with someone 5 my aunt 2 (to ) Listen and practice the text
visit Work in individually
Presentation dialogue : A1 P 140 answers questions
-Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text
- Then asks some questions
Answer keys :
Visit Hue , with her aunt and uncle, one a week , Copy down the form
visit the citadel
Model sentences :
What are you going to do ?
I'm going to visit Hue
She's stay for a week
2.Practice:
Work Cue Drill:
Asks Ss to make questions follwing example Work in pairs to answer
exchange : following example exchange :
S1: What are you going do this summer ?
S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ] S1: What are you going do this
3 Further practice : summer ?
Find S.O who S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ]
-Asks Ss to play the game following example
exchange : Work in groups to play the
S1: This summer vacation , are you going to [ game following example
stay at home ] ? exchange :
S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not S1: This summer vacation , are
Find someone who is going to you going to [ stay at home ] ?
Name S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not
******************************************************************************* 188
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

,, stay at home


... visit an aunt or uncle


... visit a new city


...stay in a hotel



.. camp in the mountais


..stay in a tent
2007
IV Consolidation:
V, Homework:
13 Do ex 1,2 P 114
14 Prepare Lesson 2 A4-5



Date: 29/3/
Period 85
Unit 14 : making plans
Lesson2 : A4-5 P 142-143
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the details text and practice
‘‘going to ‘‘ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally.
I.Knowledges : ’going to ’’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next,
after that, finally.
II. Skill: Speaking
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, spare table.

******************************************************************************* 189
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
B. Procedures :
I. Settlement
II.Checking :
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Pre- reading
Pre-teach
- The beach (example ) -
- A temple ( picture)
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in Ss listen and repeat
chorus and then individually in chorus and then
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress individually
T asks Ss to copy Ss copy down on
Check : Matching their notebook
Asks Ss to match the word in the column A with the word
in the column B
A B Work in groups to
Ha long bay play this game
Hue

Ben thanh market
Nha trang

The beach
HCM city Ss listen and order
the places
The citadel
Quang ninh

Ngoc son temple
Ha noi Read the text to
check their order
Ordering : the places and
-T says : Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places practice the text
you’ve matched in the summer vacation
1 2 3 4 5 Then fill in the
2. While –reading : correct order in the

******************************************************************************* 190
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
A4 - P 142 column one of the
-Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text , gird below in
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their order the places individually
then asks Ss to fill in the correct order in the column one
of the gird below with answer keys

Places to visit Work in
Where to stay individually to
How long change information
What to do from the text on
P.142 change
First Phuong and Mai to
Then “ I“ and
Next replacecing their
After that vacation plan with
finally the student’s own
Ha long plans
Ha noi
Hue
Nha trang

HCM

4. Post reading :
TRansformation writing:
-Asks Ss to change information from the text on P.142
change Phuong and Mai to “ I“ and replacecing their
vacation plan with the student’s own plans
Keys : I .....

IV. Consolidation:
 Asks Ss to write vocabulary.
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 2
 Do ex 3 P 114 (work book)

Date: 29/3/2007
Period 86
Unit 14 : making plans
******************************************************************************* 191
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Lesson3 :B1--4 P 144-145
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further speaking to talk about plans for
the near future
I.Knowledges : ‘‘going to ‘‘ future
II. Skill: Speaking
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :
I. Settlement
II.Checking :
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1.Review
Finding friends :(with answer keys )
Asks Ss to complete the table following example exchange : Work in
S1: What are you going to do tomorrow? individually
S2: I’m going to [do my homework] to complete the table
following example
homework exchange :
My friend S1: What are you
A soocer match
going to do
A movie
badminton tomorrow?
My mon S2: I’m going to [do
walking my homework

See




Work in pairs to
Play predict the dialogue




******************************************************************************* 192
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Ss copy down the
dialogue and Then
fill in the gaps in
pairs then practice
the dia in pairs
Do


Work in groups to
play this game
Example exchange :
S1: On Sunday
morning I’m going
to go shopping
Visit S2: On Sunday
morning I’m going
to go shopping and
on Sunday
afternoon I’m
going watch TV.


Help


Go

watch


2 Practice :
Predict dialogue :
-Asks Ss to predict the dialogue
Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?
Lan: I;m going to ......................
Tuan : What are you going to do tomorrow ?
Lan: It’s Sunday .I’m going to .................Then we’re going to
.......what about you?


******************************************************************************* 193
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Tuan : Tonight , I’m going to ....... tomorrow, I’m going
to............
Mapped dialogue
B2 P 144
-Asks Ss to make the dialogue
Example exchange :
.... tonight ? ...see a movie
. . ...... tonight ?
...help my Mom
.........tomorrow? ..... go walking
. ........tomorrow?
..play volleyball
S1: What are you going to do tonight ?
S2: I;m going to see a movie .What are you going to do tonight ?
S1: I;m going to help my mom .What are you going to ?
S2: ect.....
4.Chain game :
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs ,using the sentences
Example exchange :
S1: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping
S2: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping and on
Sunday afternoon I’m going watch TV.

IV. Consolidation:
 The form ‘going to ‘‘.
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 4
 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work bo




Date : 5 /4/2007
Period 87
Unit14 making plans
Lesson 4 B5-6 (*P. 145-146)
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further listening and reading practice with

******************************************************************************* 194
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
'going to '
I Knowledges: ''going to ''.
II Skills: reading and listening
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. Check the form
What are you going to do tomorrow?
III,New lesson:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
-1 Review :
Survey
-Asks Ss to practice the structure Work in pairs to
What are you going to do .... practice the structure
name What are you going to
tonight do ?
On Sunday
On Saturday
In the summer vacation

me

2 Pre -reading Listen and repeat in
*Pre -teach: choral, in groups, in
(to ) bring ( translation): mang individually
(to ) take a photo (mime): chôp ¶nh Then copy down on
a camera ( picture/ realia): m¸y ¶nh their notebooks
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually Work in groups tp play
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress this game
T asks Ss to copy
Check : what and where
Work in individually to
Bring take a photo a camera these answer questions

******************************************************************************* 195
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

Pre questions
-T says : Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic
1 Where are they going to ? Listen and check their
prediction ,then
2 What three things are they going to bring ? practice the text
3 What are they going to there?
3 While -reading : Work in individually
_T reads the text ,asks Ss to read to check their prediction To write vocabulary
Answer keys : A tent ,a kite , food ....
1 .near a lake 2 .a camera , food and drink 3. take a photos
4 Pre-listening:
Brainstorm

Things to bring for
a camping vacation
Then predict these
-Then asks Ss to predict these things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and
things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai
Nga bring
and Nga bring
Vui a ball
Ly a camera
Lan some food
Work in pairs to listen
Mai some drink
to the tape to check
Nga a tent
their prediction
5 While-listening :
B6 P.145
-Asks Ss to listen to the tape to check their prediction
Answer keys :
Vui: a tent ,some food
Ly : a camera
Lan : a ball
Mai and Nga : some drink
:
IV Consolidation:
V, Homework:
15 Do ex 3,4 P 115
******************************************************************************* 196
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
16 Prepare Lesson 5



Date : 5 /4/2007
Period 88
Unit14 making plans
Lesson 5: C1-3 (*P. 147)
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to make suggestions with ‘Let‘s..‘‘ and
respond, further practice in ‘want to (do) '
I Knowledges: '‘Let‘s..‘‘ ‘want to (do) ' .
II Skills: Speaking
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. AsksSs to write vocabulary
III,New lesson:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1 Presentation :
*Pre -teach:
by minibus ( example) : b»ng xe buýt nhá Listen and repeat in
a pagoda ( picture): chïa choral, in groups, in
too ( synonym very ) : rÊt individually
too far ( example ) : rÊt xa Then copy down on
T uses the techniques to elicit each word their notebooks
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check : ROR Work in groups tp play
this game
by minibus a pagoda too far


******************************************************************************* 197
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Pre questions Work in individually to
-T says : Ba,Lan and Nam are going to have a picnic answer these questions
1 Where are they going to go ? by predicting
2 How are they going to travel?
Presentation dialogue Listen and check their
_T reads the dialogue ,asks Ss to check their prediction prediction ,then
Answer keys : practice the dialogue
1 Huong pagoda 2 by minibus
_Asks Ss to answer the questions C2 P .148 in the text book
Answer keys : Work in pair to answer
the questions
a Nam wants to go to Hue
b Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda
c Lan wants to walk
d Because it’s too far
e By bike
f Because it’s too hot
g Ba wants to travel by minibus Listen and copy down
Model sentences :
-17Let’s go camping
Walk there
-18That’s a good idea
-19No,I dont’ want to Work in pairs to
2 Practice : Picture drill practice the structure
C3 a-f P.148-149 with work cue Yes/no following example
Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange
exchange S1: Let’s go to the
S1: Let’s go to the beach beach
S2: That’s a good idea/ No I dont’ want to S2: That’s a good idea/
3 Production : No I dont’ want to
Mapped dialogue
You Your friend
See a movie no..go to the beach
No...too hot Work in pairs to make
Go to the museun Yes ...walk the dialogue
No..go by minibus Yes

IV Consolidation:

******************************************************************************* 198
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
V, Homework:
20 Do ex 5 P 115
21 Prepare Lesson 6



Date : 5 /4/2007
Period 89
Unit14 making plans
Lesson 6: Grammar practice (*P. 150-153)
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in Present simple,Adv of
frequency,Present progressive ,’going to ’’ future and the weather
I Knowledges: Present simple,Adv of frequency.
Present progressive ,’going to ’’ future and the weather .
II Skills: Speaking and writing
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. AsksSs to write vocabulary
III,New lesson:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1 Present simple:
Survey:
Asks Ss to practice the structure following example Work in pairs to practice
exchange the structure following
S1: What sports do you like ? example exchange
S2: Football S1: What sports do you like
S1: What sports don’t you like ? ?
S2: swimming S2: Football
S1: What sports don’t you
Like.... .....don’t like...... like ?
S2: swimming
******************************************************************************* 199
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Name
Sports

Work in individually to
Season
write it upfollowing example
exchange
Food
Ha likes football but she
doesn’t like swimming
Drink

Work in groups to play this
Ha game
Football
Swimming



Work in groups to play this
game following example
exchange
S!: How often do you [go to
the movie ]?
S2 : Twice a week

Work in pairs to practice
the structure following
example exchange
S1:What are you going to do
?
-Asks Ss to write it up following example exchange S2 : I’m going to [ play
Ha likes football but she doesn’t like swimming football ]
2 Adv of frequency: Work in pairs to practice
Asks Ss to play the game STB the structure following
example exchange
Lu«n lu«n kh«ng bao giê thØnh tho¶ng S1 : Hung usually[ gets up
at 6 ]
******************************************************************************* 200
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
S2: That’s right but today
hai lÇn mét tuÇn thêng xuyªn mét lÇn trong n¨m he is ] [getting up at 7]
Work in individually
3 Grammar practice : toanswer the questions then
Asks Ss to play the game noughts and crosses following write a pharagraph
example exchange
S!: How often do you [go to the movie ]?
S2 : Twice a week
TV? The movies ? the store?

Swimming ? your mom? Fishing?

Table tennis? Caping ? badmonton
?
4 Future ‘going to ‘‘ :
Picture drill 4 P.151-152
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange
S1! What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to [ play football
5 Present progressive :
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange
S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6 ]
S2: That’s right but today he is ] [getting up at 7]
a. get up at 6/get up at 7
b. go to school/ go camping
c. have rice for lunch/ have a picnic
6 future plans and the weather
-Asks Ss to answer the questions
1 Where are you going to do ?
2 Who are you going to with ?
3 What season are you going to go in?
4 What ‘s the weather like then?
5 What are you going to bring with you ?
Example : I’m going to go to Sapa with my friends. We
are going to in the spring .It’s cool but we like cool
weather ...
******************************************************************************* 201
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

IV Consolidation:
Present simple,Adv of frequency.
Present progressive ,’going to ’’ future and the weather
V, Homework:
22 Prepare unit 15 Lesson

Date : 10 /4/2007
Period 90 45 minute test
A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , T can check Ss’ understanding and help
Ss review the structures they’ve learned
I . Knowledge: vocab and structures in unit 12-14
II. Skills : writing
III. Preparation: test papers
B. Contents:
I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms)
1, How .....do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d,
many
2, She ............sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They .....playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for
5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how
6, Let’s ........to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...............is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often
8, He .......TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is
watching
II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m)
1, We...............................(play) volleyball now.
2, This summer vacation, Hoa ....................(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ...........Lan.............(travel) to school?
4, I usually .....................(go ) camping in the summer .
III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):
A B
1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week
4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos
6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold
******************************************************************************* 202
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m):
Nga is a teacher,so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First,
she is going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is
going to visit Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi
Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.
1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2, She is going to travel by coach.
3, She is going to visit Da lat for three days.
4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m)
.................................
......................................
45 minute test
Student’s name : ......................................................
Class : 6
Mark Teacher’s mark


I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms)
1, How .....do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d,
many
2, She ............sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They .....playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for
5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how
6, Let’s ........to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...............is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often
8, He .......TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is
watching

II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m)
1, We...............................(play) volleyball now.
2, This summer vacation, Hoa ....................(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ........... ........Lan.............(travel) to school?
4, I usually .....................(go ) camping in the summer .
III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):
A B
1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
******************************************************************************* 203
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week
4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos
6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold

IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m):
Nga is a teacher, so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First,
she is going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is
going to visit Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi
Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.
1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2, She is going to travel by coach.
3, She is going to visit Da Lat for three days.
4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.

V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m)
..........................................................................................................................................................
.
Date: 19/4/2007
Period 92
Unit 15 : countries
Lesson 3 :A5 P 156
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a post card about being on vacation
I.Knowledges : Countries, nationalities and languages vocabulary
II. Skill: writing
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :
I. Settlement
Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking :
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1 Revision :
Work cue drill:
-Asks Ss to pratice the structure following example Work in pairs to
exchange : pratice the structure
******************************************************************************* 204
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
S1: Where is Hoa from ? following example
S2: She is from Viet nam exchange :
S1: What language does she speak ? S1: Where is Hoa from
S2 : She speaks Viet namese . ?
a. Hoa/Viet nam S2: She is from Viet
b. Tomiko/ Japan nam
c. Jo/ Australia S1: What language
d. John/ Britain does she speak ?
e. Susan/ Canada S2 : She speaks Viet
2.Pre-writing : namese .
Pre-teach:
A post card (real):
(to )be on vacation (Example ):
wet (example) : Ss listen and repeat in
a lot of (synonym: many): chorus and then
interesting places (example): individually
T uses the techniques to elicit each word Ss copy down on their
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in notebook
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy Work in groups to play
Check: What and where this game

be on vacation wet interesting
places

a lot of

-Asks Ss to read the text to answer the questions (with
answer keys a. Who is the post card from ? ( Nhan) Work in pairs to read
b. Where is he ? ( in london) the text to answer the
c. What is the weather like? (cool and wet questions (with answer
d. Is he travelling by train ? ( no,by bus ) keys
e. Who’s the postcard to ? ( Minh )
Matching
-Asks Ss to put the words into three columns (with
answer keys)
Country City interesting places Work in individually to
Japan Tokyo Mount put the words into
******************************************************************************* 205
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Fujiama three columns
Viet nam Hue The citadel
The USA New york The statue of
Liberty
China Beijing The great wall

2 While-writing :
Transformation writing” Work in groups to
-Asks Ss to write write
3 Post –wrting : Stick their poster on
Exhibition the board to correct
-T corrects their mistakes each other

V. Consolidation:
 Vocabulary
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34
 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)



Date : 20 /4/2007
Period 93
Unit15 countries
Lesson 3: B1 P. 158
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to compare places ,using the comparative
and superrlative adj of one syllable.
I Knowledges: comparative and superrlative adj of one syllable.
II Skills: Speaking
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary
III,New lesson:
******************************************************************************* 206
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

Teacher's activities Students' activities
1 Revision: Matching
-Asks Ss to choose the adjs which best describe the
cities (a city can have more than one adj Work in individually to
hot Hue choose the adjs which best
wet HCM city describe the cities (a city
cold Hoi an can have more than one adj
big Sapa )
small Ha noi
long xuyen
2 Presentation :
Presentation Text
-Reads the text, asks Ss to practice
Models :
1: Adj + er : smaller, cloder Listen and copy down the
2: Adj +est : smallest. clodest models
Note:
Double last letter +er : thinner, bigger
3 Practice: word cue drill
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange Work in pair to practice
S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang the structure following
S2: But HCM city is the biggest exaple exchange
a. Da nang Ha noi HCM city (big) S1 : Hanoi is bigger than
b. Ha noi Uong bi Sapa (clod ) Da nang
c. Vinh Long xuyen Hoi an (small) S2: But HCM city is the
d. Ha noi Can tho Hue ( wet) biggest
4 Further practice : Answer given
_T gives the answer asks Ss to make questions with
answer keys
a. Phanxipang What’s the tallest mountain in Viet
nam?
b.The Mekong What’s the biggest river in Viet nam? Work in pairs to make
c. Hue What’s the wettest city in Viet nam?
d. Sapa Whast’s the clodest town in Viet nam? questions
e. HCM city What’s the biggest city in Viet nam?

******************************************************************************* 207
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
-Asks Ss to play Noughts and crosses by comparing
their home town with towm in the box
Ha noi Hue Sapa

HCM city Da nang Hoi an
Work in groups to play
Hai phong Can tho Da lat game
Example :
Ha noi is bigger than
Quang tri
IV Consolidation:
Check the models
V, Homework:
23 Do ex 1,2 P 129
24 Prepare Lesson 4


Date : 20 /4/2007
Period 94
Unit15 countries
Lesson 4: B2-5 P. 159-161
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to read facts about famous places in the
world and practice comparatives
I Knowledges: comparative .
II Skills: Reading and Speaking
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. Asks Ss to write the sentences from the cue words
Ha noi / small/ Hcm city
HCM city /biggest city
III,New lesson:



******************************************************************************* 208
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1 Revision: Lucky numbers
-Asks Ss to play this game by asking and
answering questions Work in groups to play this
1. What’s the biggest city in Viet nam ? game
(HCM )
2. What’s the biggest city in Britain? (Lon 1
don) 2
3. What’s the biggest city in Japan ? ( Tokyo) 3
4. LN 4
5. What’s the tallest mountain you know?
6. LN 8
7. What’s the wettest you know? 7
8. Which one ‘s colder : Can tho or Sapa? 6
2 Pre-reading : 5
*Pre -teach:
high (example) : cao
long (mime) : dµi
thick (example): dµy
over
a million (translation) : mét triÖu
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and
repeat in chorus and then individually Listen and repeat in choral,
-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and in groups, in individually
stress Then copy down on their
-T asks Ss to copy notebooks
Check : Wordsquare
_Asks Ss to find out the words
W
E
T
B
I
G Work in groups to find out
the words
C
T

******************************************************************************* 209
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
H
I
C
K

L
O
N
G Work in individually to put
E the cities in order : biggest
R first

L
V
O Work in individually to
L answer the questions in B2
D P.159
X

A
E
D Work in individuallylook at
L the text to guess the
O meaning of
C 1 a population 2 the
capital city 3 a building
T 4 kilometers 5 meters
R 6 a structure
H
I
G
H

Keys :
wet, big, thick, long, longer, old, high
over,big, do, no
cool tall cold
Odering:
_Asks Ss to put the cities in order : biggest first
******************************************************************************* 210
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
HCM, LONDON, TOKYO, HANOI, MEXICO.
3While-reading :B2 P.159
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their order
Keys :
1-MEXICO, 2-TOKYO,3-LONDON, 4-HCM, 5-
HANOI -Asks Ss to answer the questions in B2
P.159
Answer Keys :
a.No,it is not
b.It’s MEXICO
c. Tokyo is bigger than London
4 Post -reading : guess from the cotext
-Asks Ss to look at the text and pictures to guess
the meaning of
1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building
4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure
_
IV Consolidation:
Check vocabulary
V, Homework:
25 Do ex 3 P.129-130
26 Prepare Lesson 5



Date : 20 /4/2007
Period 95
Unit15 countries
Lesson 5: C1-2 P. 162-164
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be describe Viet nam use “ lots of...“ as a quantitier
I Knowledges: Lots of , Geography vocabulary .
II Skills: Speaking and writing
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:

******************************************************************************* 211
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary
III,New lesson:

Teacher's activities Students' activities
1 Revision: Slap the board
-Asks Ss to play this game by listening and
slapping in the words Work in groups to play this
game
beautiful green rivers lakes


beaches fields
mountains


2 Presentation :
*Pre -teach:
a forest (picture): c¸nh rõng
a desert ( translation): sa m¹c
(to ) rain ( picture ): ma Listen and repeat in choral,
great (a) (example): vÜ ®¹i ,to lín in groups, in individually
lots of ( synonym: alot of ,many) : nhiÒu
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word Then copy down on their
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and notebooks
repeat in chorus and then individually
-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and
stress
-T asks Ss to copy Work in groups to play this
Check : R.O.R game
-Asks Ss to read the text to answer the question Work in individually to
What are the 6 ‘natural features‘ Lan tells us read the text to answer the
about ? question
Keys : ‘‘What are the 6 ‘natural
1 mountains 4 rain features’ Lan tells us about
2 rivers 5 forest ?’'
3 lakes 6 forest

******************************************************************************* 212
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Model sentences :
We have lots of mountains, rivers, forests. Listen and copy down it
Rain.
3 Practice : Picture drill C2 P.164 Work in pairs to practice
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following the structure following
example exchange : example exchange :
S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of [ mountains ] ? S1 : Does Viet nam have
S2: Yes, it does . lots of [ mountains ] ?
T/F repetition drill: S2: Yes, it does .
-Asks Ss to listen and repeat if the sentences which Listen and repeat if the
T reads is right and keep silent if it wrong sentences which T reads is
right and keep silent if it
Example : wrong
T : There are lots of beaches in Da nang Repeat
There are lots of forests in Ha noi silent
There are lots of lakes in Ha noi Repeat
4 Production : Noughts and Crosses
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following Work in pairs to practice
example exchange : the structure following
S1: Are there any[ forests] in Viet nam? example exchange :
S2: Yes/ No, there are. S1: Are there any[ forests]
in Viet nam?
Mountains rivers forests S2: Yes/ No, there are.
Beaches rain building

Trees interesting places lakes

IV Consolidation:
Check vocabulary and the structure have lots of + nouns
V, Homework:
27 Do ex 1,2 P.130
28 Prepare Lesson 6




******************************************************************************* 213
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Date : 20 /4/2007
Period 96
Unit15 countries
Lesson 6: C3 P. 165
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be understand the text about the world’s great rives
and mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and
superlatives
I Knowledges: .comparatives and superlatives
II Skills: Reading
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II,Checking. Asks Ss to write sentences with the cue words
Viet nam /have /lots of/ rain
III,New lesson:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1 Revision: Wordsquare
-Asks Ss to find out the words in the box Work in individually to find
R out the words
I
V
E
R
S
W
C

M
S
T
A Listen and repeat in choral,
R in groups, and in
T individually
******************************************************************************* 214
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
S
H Then copy down on their
notebooks
E
L
B
E Work in groups to play this
A game
C
H
I

T
R Work in groups to predict
E these sentences are T or F
E
I
G
I
N

E
I
R
O Work in pairs to read the
N text to check their
E predictions and then read
G the text again to answer the
A question in the text book

R
G
L
O
T
S
H
I
Work in groups to play the
******************************************************************************* 215
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
S game
D
L
R
O
W
X
F

Answer keys :
great, long world girl
meters, rain, high, China, of, or
river, rivers starts, beach, tree, in, lots , on
2 Pre-reading:
*Pre -teach:
the sea (picture): biÓn
Tibet ( translation): t©y t¹ng
(to ) flow to ( mime): chaû
North Afica: b¾c mü
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and
repeat in chorus and then individually
-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and
stress
-T asks Ss to copy
Check : What and Where

the sea Tibet North Afica

T/ F predictions:
-Asks Ss to predict these sentences are T or F
1. There are two great rivers in viet nam.
2 The Red river is longer than the Mekong river .
3 The Red river and the Mekong both start in
China
4 The longest river in the world os not in Viet nam
5 Phanxipang is the hightest mountain in the world
3While -reading : C3 p.165
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction s
******************************************************************************* 216
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Answer keys : 1T 2F 3F 4 T 5 F
-Asks Ss to read the text again to answer the
question in the text book C3 P. 165
Answer keys
a.The Mekong river
b. The Mekong starts in Tibet
c. The Nile river is the longest in the world
d. The Nile river flow to the Mediterrrannean
sea
E Moun Everest is the highest mountain in the
world
f Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Viet nam
4 Post-reading : Lucky number
-Asks Ss to play this game by amswering these
questions .
a. LN
b. What are the two great rivers in Viet nam ?
c. Where does the Red river start ?
d. LN
e. What does the Red river flow to ?
f. W hat does the Nile start and flow to ?
g. LN
h. Make a sentences about the lonhest river in
Viet nam?


IV Consolidation:
Check vocabulary
V, Homework:
29 Do ex 3 P.130
30 Prepare unit 16 Lesson 1



Date: 19/4/2007
Period 97
Unit 16 countries
Lesson 1 :A1-3 P 166-167
******************************************************************************* 217
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about food with countable and
uncountable quantifiers
I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few
II. Skill: speaking
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :
I. Settlement
II.Checking :
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1 Revision :
Jumble Words:
-Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the order Work in groups to
toespota = potatoes , gegs = eggs , werflos = flowers rewrite the words in
motatoes = tomatoes , icer = ucer , nonios = onions the order
tableveges = vegetables
2.Presentation :
Presentation text : A1 p.166
-Reads the text, asks Ss to listen to the text and practice
the text Ss listen , and practice
Model sentences : the text ,then give
a. How much rice is there ? examples
There is some Ss copy down on their
A lot of notebook
A little rice

b. How many eggs are there ?
There are some
Alot of eggs
A few
Work in pairs to match
3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167
- Asks Ss to match the sentences to the

Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e Work in pairs to to
Picture drill: practice the structure
A1 p.166 and A3 P.167 following example

******************************************************************************* 218
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange :
exchange : S1: How much ricwe
S 1: How much rice is there? is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions are there ? S1: How many onions
S2 : There are a few are there ?
S2 : There are afew

Work in groups to play
chain game

4 Production :
Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game
Example : S1 : There is a little rice
S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a
few eggs



IV. Consolidation:
 Vocabulary
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34
 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)




Date: 19/4/2007
Period 98
Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT
Lesson 2 :A2 P 166-167
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas of
the text about farming and getting further practice in alot, alittle, a few
I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few

******************************************************************************* 219
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
II. Skill: reading
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :
I. Settlement
Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking :
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1 Revision :
Noughts and crosses :
-Asks Ss to play the game ,use ''There [is a little rice]'' Work in groups to play the
game ,use ''There [is a little
a dozen eggs two potatoes 1/2 a glass of rice]''
milk

1/2 kilo onions 100 g rice 4 kilos
vegetables

1 kilo fruit 2 tomatoes 2 flowers

2.Pre-reading : Ss listen and repeat in
Pre-teach chorus and then individually
animals (picture): Ss copy down on their
a buffalow (picture): notebook
a cow (picture):
( to ) flow (picture):
(to ) pull a cart (picture):
(to ) grow (picture):
(to ) procedure (picture):
- T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in Work in individually to
chorus and then individually write vocab
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check: Net work

animals

******************************************************************************* 220
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
grow on the farm


fruit / rice / vegetables procedure
Work in groups to predict 6
*open -prediction : things Mr Hai has on his
-Asks Ss to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm farm and 5 things he has
and 5 things he has procedures with answer keys procedures
Mr Hai has Mr Hai procedures
1 paddy fields rice
2 a small vegetable field vegetables
3 fruit trees fruit
4 buffalow milk
5 cows eggs
6 chickens Listen and reads the text to
3 While -reading: check their predictions
-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions
3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167 work in pairs to match the
- Asks Ss to match the sentences to the picture sentences to the picture
Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e
Picture drill: Work in pairs to practice
A1 p.166 and A3 P.167 the structure following
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example example exchange :
exchange : S1: How much rice is there?
S 1: How much rice is there? S2: There is alot/ lots
S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are
S1: How many onions are there ? there ?
S2 : There are afew S2 : There are a few

4 Production : Work in groups to play
Chain game : chain game
-Asks Ss to play chain game
Example : S1 : There is a little rice
S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and
a few eggs

IV. Consolidation:

******************************************************************************* 221
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
 Vocabulary
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34
 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)




******************************************************************************* 222
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

Date: 29/4/2007
Period 99
Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT
Lesson 3 :A4-5 P 168
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas in
terms of cause and effectof the text about the environment
I.Knowledges : Why ...? Because ......
II. Skill: reading
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :
II. Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1 Revision :matching
-Asks Ss to match Viet namese with EL words
the population rõng forests Work in groups to match
trång Viet namese with EL words
the world n«ng d©n farmer
grow d©n sè fields
con vËt
food thøc ¨n animals
thÕ giíi
2.Pre-reading :
Pre-teach
land (picture): ®Êt ®ai Ss listen and repeat in
plants(picture): thùc vËt chorus and then individually
( to )burn (picture): ®èt ch¸y Ss copy down on their
(to ) destroy( translation): ph¸ huû notebook
(to ) cut down (synomyn: grow ): chÆt ph¸
in danger( example): mèi nguy hiÓm
- T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
******************************************************************************* 223
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
T asks Ss to copy Work in groups to play this
Check: What and where game

land plants burn


destroy in danger cut down



ordering: Work in groups order the
-Asks Ss order the words words
1.produce 2.cut down 3. more food 4. burn 5-3- 2- 6 -1-7
5. grow 6. make new fields 7. animals and plants in
danger.
3 While -reading: A4 p. 168
-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. Listen and reads the text to
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions check their predictions
Answer keys : Then answer the questions
1. Because we grow trees
2. Because we need wood
3. Because we are destroyingthe forests
4 Post -reading : Picture story
Asks Ss to retell story,using their words Work in groups to retell
story,using their words




IV. Consolidation:
 Vocabulary
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 16 Lesson4
 Do ex (work book)




******************************************************************************* 224
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Date: 29/4

Period 100
Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT
Lesson 4 :B1 P 169
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas
about the pollution
I.Knowledges : pollution vocabulary
II. Skill: reading
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :
III. Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1 Revision :STB
-Asks Ss to play this game
Work in groups to match
ph¸ huû ®èn c©y s¶n xuÊt convËt Viet namese with EL words


mèi nguy hiÓm ®èt ch¸y c©y ®Êt ®ai

2.Pre-reading :
Pre-teach
The enviroment (trasnlation): m«i trêng
The ocean (synomyn: sea ): ®¹i d¬ng Ss listen and repeat in
( to) pollute (example):oo nhiÔm chorus and then individually
(to) waste (translation): l¶ng phÝ Ss copy down on their
the air(example): kh«ng khÝ notebook
coal( realia): than ®¸
oil( realia):dÇu
gas (translation): ga
power (example ):
- T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
******************************************************************************* 225
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
chorus and then individually Work in groups to play this
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress game
T asks Ss to copy
Check: What and where


gas oil coal


the air waste ocean power

Pre questions -Predict :
-Asks SS to predict the answers with answer keys Work in groups to predict
1.What are we destroying ? the answers
- forests, wild animals, plants
2.What are we wasting ?
- water, coal, oil , gas
3. What are we polluting ?
- the air, the land, the rivers, the oceans
3 While -reading: B1 P.169
-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. Listen and reads the text to
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions check their predictions
Answer keys : Then answer the questions
a. Because we are destroying
b. Gases is polluting the air
c.
4 Post -reading : Write it up
-Asks Ss to use the predict pre questions to make a list Work in groups to use the
of ‘‘ don‘ts ‘‘ predict pre questions to
Example : Don’t destroy our environment make a list of ‘‘ don‘ts ‘
Don’t destroy the forest
Don’t destroy the plants
Don’t destroythe wild animals
Don’t waste water
Don’t pollute the air
Don’t pollute the oceans


IV. Consolidation:
******************************************************************************* 226
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
 Vocabulary
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5
 Do ex (work book)




Date: 29/4

Period 101
Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT
Lesson 5 :B2 P 170-171
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to give advice about protecting the
environment
I.Knowledges : Should and shouldn’t.
II. Skill: Speaking
III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :
IV. Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1 Revision :Noughts and crosses
-Asks Ss to play this game by using ‘‘Don‘t .......‘‘
plants water the air Work in groups to play this
game by using ‘‘Don‘t
power wild animals the oceans .......’’
Example : Don’t destroy
forests coal trash plants

Example : Don’t destroy plants
2.Presentation :B2 P.170-171
-Reads the text , asks Ss to guess the new words from
******************************************************************************* 227
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
context with answer keys Ss listen and guess the new
(to) throw = nÐm words from context
(to) pick = nhÆt
(to) damage= ph¸ huû, lµm háng
(to) keep off = tr¸nh khái
(to) save = tiÕt kiÖm
(to) collect = thu gom
-Asks Ss to match the rulres with these signs
Answer keys :
a- picture c b- picture f c- picture a d- picture Work in individually
h tomatch the rulres with
e- picture e f- picture b g - pictureg h- picture these signs
d
*Model sentences :
We should collect paper
Save water Listen and copy donw the
We shouldn’t throw trash on the streets sentences
damage trees.
3 Practice:
-Asks Ss to match and write these sentences with Work in individually to
should and shouldn’t match and write these
Example : sentences with should and
We should collect paper shouldn’t
Should damage trash
collect trees We should collect paper
10. throw paper We shouldn’t throw trash
Shouldn’t save flowers
11. pick bottles and cans
Picture drill :
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
S1: We shouldn’t [ damage trees ] Work in pairs to practice
S2: That’s right the structure following
example
4 Further practice : Noughts and crosses S1: We shouldn’t [ damage
-Asks Ss to play this game trees ]
damage save waster S2: That’s right

destroy pollute collect Work in groups to play this
game
******************************************************************************* 228
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
throw cut down pick
Example : We should/shouldn’t ....

IV. Consolidation:
 Vocabulary
V. Homework:
 Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5
 Do ex (work book)




Date: 2/5/2007
Period 103
Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT
Lesson 5 :B2 P 170-171
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice present simple and
progressive , comparative and superlatives, quantifiers and countability.
I.Knowledges :
Country, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary.
II.Skill:
Speaking and writing
III.Preparation :
Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :
I.Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking :
. III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Countries and Languages:
*Simple present : T-Whole class
-T recalls the way to use this tense
Form: S + V-s/es
Uses: miªu t¶ hµnh ®éng thêng xuyªn x·y ra
Work in groups to to do
Countries and Languages exercise 1p.174 (text book)
******************************************************************************* 229
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************

Japanese
Japan
-Ask ss to do exercise 1p.174 (text book)
Answerkey:
a.Are... from/ Am not/ speak
b.Speaks
c.Is Chinese e.Is Vietnamese
d.Is Japanese f.Is American
2.Present simple and present progressive:
+Mapped dialouge:
Work in pairs to mapped
........name? Susan the dialouge
........Live ? London
.......Stay now? Hanoi
.......do ? Teacher
What....teach ? English
......teach you? No, .....Mr Hai

Answer key:
1.What is her name?
2.Where does she live?
3.Where is she staying now?
4.What does she do?
5.What does she teach?
6.Does she teach you?
-ask ss to do the exercise 2 P.174 (text book)
3.Adj: Comparative and superlatives:
-Asks Ss to complete the table and then complete the
passages. Work in individually to
complete the table and then
Long complete the passages.
Longer
Longest

Short

Tall

******************************************************************************* 230
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Lesson plan English 6 – Dong Thi Hoang Yen
******************************************************************************
Small

Big

High
Thick
a. The Mekong river is long. The Amazon river is
...than the Mekong. The Nile river is.....river in
the world.
b. The Great Wall of China is long. It is... ...
structure in the world
c. Sears Tower in Chicago is tall, but it isn’t .... ...
building in the world. Petronas twin Tower in
Kuala Lumpur is .... than Sears Tower. It is ... ...
building in the world.
d. Ha noi is gig, bt it is not the .... city in Viet nam.
HCMC is ... than Hanoi. It is ... city invietnam.
But Mexico city is.. ...city in the world.

IV. Consolidation:
 Vocabulary
V. Homework:




******************************************************************************* 231
DinhTri secondary school - School year: 2010 - 2011
Đề thi vào lớp 10 môn Toán |  Đáp án đề thi tốt nghiệp |  Đề thi Đại học |  Đề thi thử đại học môn Hóa |  Mẫu đơn xin việc |  Bài tiểu luận mẫu |  Ôn thi cao học 2014 |  Nghiên cứu khoa học |  Lập kế hoạch kinh doanh |  Bảng cân đối kế toán |  Đề thi chứng chỉ Tin học |  Tư tưởng Hồ Chí Minh |  Đề thi chứng chỉ Tiếng anh
Theo dõi chúng tôi
Đồng bộ tài khoản